BERO Proximity Switches

Transcription

1 BERO Proximity Switches /4 IQ Sense /4 Introduction /5 IQ Sense photoelectric sensors /7 IQ Sense ultrasonic sensors /8 Sensor module 4 IQ IQ Sense sensor module for ET 00S 8 IQ Sense sensor module for S7-300/ET 00M /9 Sonar BEROs /9 Summary of ranges /10 Introduction /6 Compact ranges I to III /8 Compact range III /30 Compact range II /31 Compact range I /3 Configuration assistance for compact ranges I to III /34 M 18 compact range /36 M 18 S compact range /38 Compact range for pump control /39 K 08 compact form /40 Compact range 0 /4 3SG16 compact form /44 K 65 compact form /47 Sonar through-beam sensor /49 Double layer sheet monitoring /51 Accessories for Sonar BERO /51 SONPROG interface device /53 Mounting sets /54 Opto BEROs /54 Summary of ranges /58 Introduction /67 D 4 form /68 M 5 form /69 M 1 form /71 M 18 S form /73 M 18 form /74 M 18 P form /77 K 0 form /78 K 1, K 1 R forms /80 K 31 form /8 K 30 form /84 K 40 form /86 C 40 form /88 K 80 form /91 KL 40 form /9 CL 40 form color sensors /93 C 80 form color mark sensors /94 L 18 form Laser /96 L 50 form Laser /98 Light arrays /99 Accessories for Opto BERO /99 Plastic optical fibers /101 Mounting brackets /103 Reflectors /104 Inductive BEROs /104 Summary of ranges /108 Introduction /1 Operating dist. 0.6 mm /13 Operating dist. 0.8 mm /14 Operating dist. 1 mm /16 Operating dist. 1.5 mm /130 Operating dist. mm /136 Operating dist..5 mm /140 Operating dist. 3 mm /143 Operating dist. 3 mm, pressure resistant to 500 bar /144 Operating dist. 4 mm /151 Operating dist. 5 mm /156 Operating dist. 6 mm /157 Operating dist. 0 to 6 mm, with analog output /158 Operating dist. 8 mm /164 Operating dist. 10 mm /169 Operating dist. 10 mm Operating dist. 1 mm /171 Operating dist. 15 mm /180 Operating dist. 0 mm /186 Operating dist. mm /187 Operating dist. 5 mm /189 Operating dist. 30 mm /191 Operating dist. 35 mm /19 Operating dist. 40 mm /198 Operating dist. 50 mm Operating dist. 65 mm /199 Operating dist. 75 mm /00 Capacitive BEROs /00 Introduction /0 10 to 65 V DC /04 0 to 50 V AC /05 Accessories for BERO /05 Power supply units /07 Connectors /1 Distributors /13 Mounting accessories Siemens FS

2 BERO sensors the sense organs for automation The comprehensive range of BERO sensors always provides the correct solution for whatever your application. Irrespective of what is happening in automated processes: the BERO sensors hear, see and sense everything they are the sense organs for automation. SENSORS Even under adverse conditions: reliable detection using Sonar BEROs The range of applications for the Sonar BERO ultrasonic sensors is practically unlimited. Whether level, height or distance measurements are involved, or the counting of bottles, etc. at a distance of 6 cm to 10 m, Sonar BEROs detect objects of any kind, even liquids, powders, colored or transparent objects. The nature of the surfaces is irrelevant, they can be rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry. Accurate in detection, absolutely safe in use: Sonar BEROs are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration, ambient light or ambient noise. Accurate detection at first glance: No problem for Opto BEROs Available in many different designs and versions to satisfy all possible requirements: Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensors with background suppression Retroreflective sensors Thru-beam sensors. Opto BEROs are preferably used in the following sectors: Conveying and handling systems Mechanical engineering Paper, textile and plastics processing Printing technology Packaging technology. Operating with either infrared, red or laser light, the comprehensive range of Opto BEROs cover distances up to 50 m. They can be set quickly and easily by means of teach-in or a potentiometer. /

3 Plant-wide communication down to the sensor level easy and fast to implement with IQ Sense Metal or non-metal? The answer is provided by inductive or capacitive BEROs Inductive BEROs are the low-cost method for non-contact detection of metal objects. They are preferably used in the automotive industry, in mechanical engineering, in the robot industry, but also for conveying and handling systems or in the paper and printing industry. Inductive BEROs are extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to no-wear operation as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water. Many different versions cover all possible applications and demands. IQ Sense IQ Sense offers a completely new concept for intelligent integration of sensors into automation engineering. Just like all products and systems incorporated in our Totally Integrated Automation platform, IQ Sense devices also feature the same properties with respect to communications capability, data management and configuration/programming. This provides advantages in every aspect, and not just enormous savings potential for engineering. For the first time, plant-wide communication can be implemented down to the sensor level extremely profitably and in a particularly easy manner. Summary of IQ Sense highlights Intelligent communication between sensor and PLC Parameter and diagnostics data of sensors are available throughout the plant Error-free from planning through to wiring up thanks to simple interfaces Optimum interaction between sensors and PLC even for future types of sensors Reliable at every performance level IQ Sense modules and sensors Sensor module 4 IQ Sense for ET 00S Sensor module 8 x IQ Sense for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 00M Optical sensors for IQ Sense Ultrasonic sensors for IQ Sense Capacitive BEROs are also non-contact sensors for measuring conducting and nonconducting materials as solids, powders or liquids. Typical applications include level signaling or monitoring. /3

4 IQ Sense BERO Proximity Switches Introduction Overview Sensors and PLCs are growing together Thanks to intelligent linking to the PLC, IQ Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages for plant construction as well as for its operation. For example, the new IntelliTeach function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast commissioning, since all settings for the IQ Sense devices can be made using the PLC. Values set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem. Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PLC automatically reestablishes all sensor settings. Furthermore, IQ Sense permits channel-specific system diagnostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/sensor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization errors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability. Summary of features 7 Low wiring overhead thanks to polarity-independent two-wire design 7 Fast commissioning and dynamic modification of parameters by IntelliTeach 7 High plant availability thanks to signals and displays for preventive maintenance (e.g. warning of surplus light emission in case of contamination or maladjustment of optical sensors) 7 Avoidance of mutual influencing of sensors due to anti-interference function 7 Channel-specific system diagnostics 7 Fast replacement of sensors due to automatic re-parameterization without renewed teach-in. Wiring system IQ Sense uses a two-wire system between sensor and channel of the IQ Sense module. Standard unshielded cables with a maximum permissible length of 50 m can be used for this pointto-point connection. The cable is used for both the power supply and data communication. Configuration/parameterization Uniform configuration tools such as STEP 7 or COM PB permit uniform and central data management of the configuration and parameterization data for all sensors. The static settings of the various types of sensor, such as "optical" and "ultrasonic", are defined by sensor profiles which are already present in STEP 7 or in the GSD file of the IQ Sense modules and which can be set there. Settings which can be modified during operation can be taught directly on the sensor or defined by the PLC using IntelliTeach. Processing of the process values All process values, settings and sensor-specific data are present in the PLC program and are available throughout the system. A supplied function block for SIMATIC S7 supports the provision and evaluation of these data for the S7 programming engineer. Diagnostics No additional hardware is required for transmission of the diagnostics information. This is carried out event-driven through the two-wire line. The messages associated with channel-specific sensor diagnostics are embedded both in the S7 system diagnostics and in the PROFIBUS DP standard diagnostics. Access to these messages is therefore identical to that with all other automation components. IntelliTeach IntelliTeach is the specification of the variable sensor settings by the PLC or by an Human-Machine-Interface device (OP operator panel, field PG), and presents the following advantages for you: 7 Commissioning: A sensor is trained using the current objects. Using IntelliTeach, the determined settings can be copied to any number of further sensors. 7 During operation: Various batch-dependent settings can be saved in the PLC, called as required, and downloaded to the sensors. Parameter management The configuration data of the sensors together with the static settings are set in the configuring tool and saved in the CPU. The settings can be modified during operation and are saved on the IQ Sense module. No settings are saved in the sensor itself. If a sensor is replaced, all settings are automatically reestablished by the IQ Sense module. EMC IQ Sense complies with the following EMC guidelines: 7 Electrostatic discharge resistance to IEC : 8 kv air discharge, 4 kv indirect discharge 7 High-frequency resistance according to IEC : 10 V/m 7 Fast transient resistance according to IEC : kv 7 RF conducted interference according to IEC : 10 kv 7 Emitted interference requirements according to EN 55011: Group 1, Level B (permissible also in residential and office buildings). /4 Siemens FS

5 IQ Sense IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors Overview Opto BERO with IQ Sense, C 40 form Opto BERO with IQ Sense, K 80 form The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected. These sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic. Depending on the type of BERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. The following operating modes are possible with IQ Sense: 7 Diffuse sensors (energetic) 7 Diffuse sensors with background suppression 7 Retroreflective sensors Features: 7 C 40 IQ Sense and K 80 IQ Sense forms 7 IntelliTeach functionality 7 Integral anti-interference function 7 Advanced failure signal (contamination/maladjustment). Functions Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) The light from the emitter falls on an object and is reflected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the output is switched. The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiometer. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors. Diffuse sensor with background suppression Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All objects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is suppressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver. Retroreflective sensors The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed by a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range. An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch. See page /54 for more details on the photoelectric proximity switches. Siemens FS /5

6 IQ Sense BERO Proximity Switches IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors Form C40 IQ Sense K80 IQ Sense Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range m 0,7 Standard target mm (white) Emitter (type of light) nm 660 (red LED ) 880 (IR LED) Current input ma 50 Response time ms 1 LEDs Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green) Enclosure material ABS + PBTP PBTP Degree of protection IP67 Dimensions mm Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m Standard target mm (white) Emitter (type of light) nm 880 (IR LED) Current input ma 50 Response time ms LEDs Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green) Enclosure material PBTP Degree of protection IP67 Dimensions mm Retroreflective sensor Sensing range m 6 8 Reflector Type D84, 3RX7916 Emitter (type of light) nm 660 (red LED, polarized) Current input ma 50 Response time ms 1 LEDs Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green) Enclosure material ABS + PBTP PBTP Degree of protection IP67 Dimensions mm Version Form Operating mode Order No. Photoelectric sensors for connection to the 4 IQ Sense sensor module C40 IQ Sense Diffuse sensor 3SF7 40-3JQ00 Retroreflective sensor with 3SF7 41-3JQ00 K80 IQ Sense Diffuse sensor 3SF7 10-3JQ00 Diffuse sensor with background 3SF7 14-3JQ00 suppression Retroreflective sensor with 3SF7 11-3JQ00 /6 Siemens FS

7 IQ Sense IQ-Sense ultrasonic sensors Overview The Sonar BEROs of the M18 IQ compact range are all-in-one units ready for connection, and have a cylindrical M 18 enclosure for connection to the S7-300/ET 00M IQ Sense module SM338, 8 IQ Sense 7 5 operating modes Operation as a measuring sensor ("Analog signal"), Diffuse sensor with background suppression, Diffuse sensor with large differential travel, Diffuse sensor with foreground and background suppression, Retroreflective sensor. 7 Static setting of parameters using STEP 7 7 Dynamic setting of parameters using an S7 function block 7 Measured distance from object is always transmitted 7 Synchronization capability, multiplex operation 7 Temperature compensation 7 Connection through M1 connector 7 Non-polarized two-wire system (protected against polarity reversal) 7 Channel-specific system diagnostics (e.g. wire break, shortcircuit, parameterization faults). Design The devices of the M18 IQ compact range are always supplied with permanently installed sensors. Functions The devices are suitable for various operating modes. The operating mode is statically parameterizable using the S7 Manager. The following are possible: 7 Switching signal deactivated; only transmission of the analog value (distance) 7 Switching signal: sensor with background suppression + analog value 7 Switching signal: sensor with large differential travel + analog value 7 Switching signal: sensor with foreground and background suppression + analog value 7 Switching signal: retroreflective sensor + analog value The sensor cyclically transmits the distance (analog value) to the module. Furthermore, the following static parameters can be set: 7 Differential travel (1 % / 5 % / 8 % / 10 %) 7 Temperature compensation 7 Mean value 7 Attenuation 7 Time function and time value 7 Sync mode (multiplex/synchronization) 7 Setting of switching points (teach-in/parameterization) 7 Sensor ID. The following dynamic parameters are available: 7 Start and end of switching range (using teach-in/parameterization). Various data/information can be read out from the sensor during operation: 7 Sensor identification (manufacturer, Order No., version, sensor ID, set parameters, etc.) 7 Diagnostics. Following enabling of the local teach-in, the beginning and end of the switching range can be set using the built-in potentiometer. The found value is then available as a dynamic parameter. Type 3SF6 3 3JA00 3SF6 33 3JA00 Sensing range Rated value cm Maximum value cm Standard target mm Differential travel H (adjustable) mm Repeat accuracy R mm 1 Operational voltage (DC) From IQ Sense Rated operating current I e From IQ Sense No-load supply current I 0 From IQ Sense Adjustment/parameterization Start and end of the switching range using IQ Sense (IntelliTeach) or local teach-in using potentiometer Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz 8 4 Response time ms Measuring time ms Status display Yellow LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature Operation C Storage C Version Form Sensing range Order No. cm Ultrasonic sensors M 18 IQ Sense SF6 3 3JA00 for connection to IQ Sense SF6 33 3JA00 Siemens FS /7

8 IQ Sense BERO Proximity Switches 4 IQ Sense sensor module for ET 00S 8 IQ Sense sensor module for ET 00M/S7-300 Overview 7 Can be plugged onto TM-E terminal module with automatic coding. Additionally with ET 00M: 7 Reading of vendor-specific and sensor-specific data (e.g. manufacturer, Order No., release version, etc.) directly out of the sensor. 4 IQ Sense module for ET 00S 7 The 4 IQ Sense module is an intelligent 4-channel electronics module for the ET 00S distributed I/O station in the PROFIBUS DP networking system. It is used to connect photoelectric sensors with IQ Sense technology. 7 The 8 IQ Sense sensor module is an intelligent 8-channel I/O module for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 00M, and is used to connect photoelectric and ultrasonic sensors with IQ Sense technology. Mixing of different sensor types on one module is possible. Standard function blocks are available for simplified handling on a SIMATIC S7. Conventional sensors cannot be used on these modules. Main applications of the IQ Sense system are plants and machines 7 with high availability demands, 7 with a high probability of mutual influencing of the sensors, 7 with high flexibility and dynamic modification requirements for the sensor parameters. System ET 00S S7-300 / ET 00M Type 4 IQ Sense 8 IQ Sense Number of inputs 4 8 Cable length Unshielded,max. 50 m Shielded, max. 50 m Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage 4 V DC (from power module) Reverse polarity protection yes Electrical isolation Between the channels no Between the channels yes and backplane bus Permissible potential difference Between different circuits 75 V DC, 60 V AC Insulation tested at 500 V DC Current input From power supply, max. 0.3 A 1 A From backplane bus 150 ma Module power loss, typ W Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Diagnostics functions Group fault Red LED "SF" Reading of diagnostics information yes Data for selection of a sensor Connectable sensors Photoelectric sensors Photoelectric and with IQ Sense ultrasonic sensors with IQ Sense Response times Cycle time, max. 3.4 ms 6 ms Functions Construction 7 Connection of up to 4 or 8 IQ Sense sensors Dimensions W H D (mm) Low wiring overhead ( wires, polarity-independent) Weight, approx kg 0.50 kg 7 Rapid commissioning thanks to IntelliTeach: - Presetting of sensor parameters, or copying of parameters set by teach-in onto other modules/sensors - Dynamic modification of parameters (e.g. range setting) using PLC program 4 IQ Sense 6ES GA00-0AB0 Order No. - Integral alignment support using LED display sensor modules 8 IQ Sense 6ES XF00-0AB0 7 High plant availability due to: sensor module - signals and displays for preventive maintenance (e.g. warning of surplus light emission in case of contamination or maladjustment of optical sensors) - No mutual influencing of sensors (anti-interference function) 7 Channel-specific system diagnostics (e.g. open-circuit, shortcircuit, module/sensor failure, etc.) 7 Fast replacement of sensors due to automatic re-parameterization without renewed teach-in (alignment) Additionally with ET 00S: 7 Hot swapping of modules possible /8 Siemens FS

9 Sonar BEROs Summary of ranges Overview The following table lists the most important technical features of the individual ranges. Compact range I Compact range II Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor $ Thru-beam sensors Output 1 switching output switching outputs switching output + 1 analog output 7 1 analog output frequency output Analog output 0 to 0 ma to 0 ma to 10 V Adjustment 1 potentiometers 7 7 potentiometers SONPROG interface device Plug-in jumpers 7 Teach-in Keys Wiring 7 Parameters adjustable using SONPROG Blind zone End of sensing range Lower limit of operating range 7 7 $ 7 Upper limit of operating range 7 7 $ 7 Differential travel 7 7 $ 7 NO/NC function 7 7 $ 7 Lower limit of analog range 7 & Upper limit of analog range 7 & Characteristic of analog output 7 & Current range of analog output 7 & Mean value generation Function mode Temperature compensation Enabling/disabling of potentiometers 7 7 $ For description, see page /31 /30 /8 /34 /36 /39 /40 /4 /44 /47 /49 Compact range III M18 compact range M18 S compact range K08 compact form Compact range 0 3SG16 compact form K65 compact form Sonar thru-beam sensor Double-layer sheet monitoring Sonar BERO programmable using SONPROG interface device 7 Available $ Only available for units with switching output & Only available for units with analog output Siemens FS /9

10 Introduction Overview BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Explosion protection The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges 0 to III and M18 as well as the sonar thru-beam sensors and compact form sensors 3SG16 and K 65 are suitable for installation in Ex-Zone and Ex-Zone 11. Personal safety Due to their physical characteristics, the Sonar BERO ultrasonic proximity switches cannot be used for safety-related applications ( e.g. for the protection of personnel). NSD00801 Application examples Sonar BEROs can be used as non-contact proximity switches in many fields of automation. Whenever distances through air have to be evaluated, these devices can be used, because they not only detect objects, but can also output and evaluate the absolute distance between the Sonar BERO and the object. Changing environmental conditions (e. g. temperature variations) are compensated during evaluation of the measurement. Sonar BEROs measure the runtime of the ultrasonic pulse emitted by the BERO and reflected by the object from which they can calculate the distance to the object. Sonar BEROs can operate over extremely short (6 cm) or extremely long distances (10 m) with ease. With the SONPROG software, it is easy to calibrate the BERO to the object and operating range (e.g. minimum fill level). Area of application The wide range of areas of application for the Sonar BERO ultrasonic sensors gives full rein to the imagination: Fill level and height sensing Spacing measurement Winding diameter sensing Bottle counting, and much more. The Sonar BEROs are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration and ambient noise. Objects Using ultrasonic technology, Sonar BEROs can detect objects of any kind, this includes liquids, powders or granulates, and colored or transparent objects. Whether the surface of the object is rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry is of no consequence. Even at a maximum operating distance, all level or smooth surfaces can be reliably detected up to an angular variation of approximately 3 from the sound cone. Depending on the peak-tovalley height of the object, the angular variation may also be higher. As a rule, the objects can enter the sound cone from any direction. Level measurement in large tanks: Compact K 65 form with minimum/maximum monitoring (up to.5 m), M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m) Level measurement in small bottles: M18 compact range with analog output Size measurement: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m) /10 Siemens FS

11 Sonar BEROs Introduction Measurement of stack height: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m) Object measurement: M18 compact range with switching output Measurement of diameter and speed: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m) Quality inspection: M18 compact range with switching output, compact range II (up to 6 m) Contour measurement (synchronization): M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m) Breakage monitoring: M18 compact range with switching output (up to 30 cm) Loop monitoring: K 65 compact form with minimum/maximum monitoring (up to.5 m), compact range II with switching outputs Wire and rope breakage monitoring: M18 compact range with switching output, compact range II Bottle counting and detection of intervals: Sonar thru-beam sensor Distance monitoring: compact range II with switching outputs (up to 6 m) Siemens FS /11

12 Sonar BEROs Introduction Special applications Compact range 0, I, II, III, M18 (special version) Compact range 0, I, II, III, M18 (special version) Compact range II with switching outputs (special version) Compact range II, M18 (special version) K 65 compact form Compact range II with switching outputs (special version) Compact range II with frequency output Compact range II (special version) Sonar thru-beam sensor Compact range II (special version) In chemically corrosive medium 7 Ultrasonic transducer with Teflon foil For food processing 7 Ultrasonic sensor with teflon film, PPS ring, enclosure made of stainless steel V4A Stroke control for machines 7 with minimum/maximum detection separately adjustable switching points Level monitoring for pump control 7 with 1 switching output Switching point for "Full" signal and pump stroke separately adjustable Level monitoring for pump control 7 with switching outputs For "Full" signal with Differential Travel 1, for switch-off at limit with Differential Travel, level-dependent signaling Roll diameter monitoring 7 Warning signal with switching output 1, switch-off at limit with switching output Threshold measurement using LOGO! 7 The frequency output is measured by the counter inputs of the LOGO! control units: several threshold values assigned to the relay outputs of the LOGO! control unit Gate control, entrance control 7 Parameterizable pickup/dropout delay, Sonar BERO used for operating gates Transport belt control 7 Used in cabinet with emitter and receiver: no blind zone, max. switching frequency 00 Hz, insensitive to dust and condensation Loop control for control of sag Averaging and differential travel with echo pulse detection For description, see page /38 /44 /31 /47 7 /1 Siemens FS

13 Sonar BEROs Design Mounting Sonar BEROs can be operated in any mounting position. Mounting positions in which deposits can settle on the transducer surface must however be avoided. The best results are obtained if the Sonar BEROs are aligned such that the ultrasound waves hit the object as near to the vertical as possible. If this is not possible (e.g. in the case of bulk material), the maximum possible range must be determined experimentally. This depends on the material, surface and alignment of the objects. To prevent undesirable reflections, the distance a must be maintained from disturbing objects around the axis of the sound cone. Between the sound cone axis and a smooth wall running in parallel to it, the distance b must be maintained to prevent disturbing reflections. The distance c must be maintained to ensure that no objects enter the blind zone (see the sound cones). Mounting multiple sensors Mutual interference between Sonar BEROs that can result in spurious signals is excluded by maintaining sufficient distances between the sensors or an appropriate alignment. If two Sonar BEROs of an identical design are mounted opposite each other, the distance d must be maintained between them. If two sensors of identical design are arranged in parallel, the distance e must be maintained between the sensors. To avoid mutual interference, BERO sensors of compact ranges 0, II, III and M18 can be synchronized or operated in multiplex mode (see Functions ). Fouling The range of the BERO is reduced if the transducer surface is damaged or painted or if water or wet dirt is applied to it. Introduction Clearance a around the axis of the sound cone: keep space free of objects Sonar BERO with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 130 (100) 40 to to to 1000 Distance b between two Sonar BEROs and a smooth surface b Sonar-BERO Sonar BERO with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 130 (100) 40 to to to 1000 a cm > 6 > 30 > 60 > 90 > 150 b cm > 3 > 15 > 30 > 40 > 70 Distance d between two Sonar BEROSonar BEROs mounted opposite each other with the same sensing range Sonar BERO with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 130 (100) 40 to to to 1000 d cm > 10 > 400 > 100 > 500 > 4000 Distance e between two Sonar BEROs arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object perpendicular to the axis of the sound cone Sound cone NSD00749 Sonar BERO with sensing range cm 6 (5) to 30 0 to 130 (100) 40 to to to 1000 Distance e between two Sonar BEROs arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object with unfavorable orientation e cm > 15 > 60 > 150 > 50 > 350 The distance e must be experimentally determined depending on the angle between the object and the Sonar BERO. Siemens FS /13

14 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Introduction Functions The Sonar BEROs only operate through the medium of air and can detect any object that reflects ultrasound. The sensors emit ultrasonic pulses cyclically. When an object reflects these pulses, the generated echo is received and converted into an electrical signal. The incoming echo is detected in accordance with its intensity which, in turn, is dependent on the distance between the object and the Sonar BERO. The Sonar BEROs operate according to the echo propagation principle i.e. the time difference between the emitted pulse and the echo pulse is evaluated. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. Resolution The resolution is the smallest change in the distance to the object that is necessary for a change in the output of the BERO. The internal resolution is 56 or 4096 steps. If values are entered during programming that exceed this resolution, the program will automatically correct them. The corrected values will be displayed in a window with a message. Example Sonar BERO 3RG (60 to 600 cm) For a sensing range 60 to 600 cm, this results in a resolution of 1.3 mm: 6000 mm 600 mm = 5400 mm 5400 mm/4096 = 1.3 mm (1 bit) If the measuring range is restricted, the step size is reduced because the distance that is split up into 4096 steps has reduced. The smallest step size is, however, limited to 1 mm by the electronics. If the sensing range is restricted, the resolution is enhanced. Temperature compensation The Sonar BEROs of compact range II, III and M18 as well as modular range II are fitted with temperature sensors and a compensation circuit that equalizes changes in operating distances caused by temperature changes. Compensation can be performed throughout the temperature range. This means that an absolute precision of +/- 1.5 % (compact ranges II and III) or of +/-.5 % (compact range M18) is achieved. Operating modes with switching output The Sonar BEROs with switching output (the graphics describe sensors with NO function) can be used in the following modes depending on their type. Only emitter, only receiver Two Sonar BEROs are required in each case for this operating mode. One is parameterized as a receiver and the other is parameterized as the emitter. There are two possible applications: 7 Thru-beam sensor: It is only evaluated whether an object lies between the BEROs. The range is twice the normal range. Adjustment of the operating range and evaluation of the analog output is not relevant in this case. Emitter Object Receiver Object detected, switching output active NSD0_0104a 7 Active measurement system: The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal from the emitter to the receiver is measured. The enabling inputs of the two BEROs must be connected together for this purpose. All options of the BEROs can still be used; the range is twice the normal range. Emitter and receiver This is the normal operating mode of the Sonar BERO; it operates as a typical proximity switch. 7 Diffuse sensor: In this case, the object that is to be detected acts as a reflector. As soon as an object enters the preset operating range, the echo from this object causes the output signal of the BERO to change. Operating range Object not detected, switching output not active Operating range Object detected, switching output active NSD0_010 7 Reflex sensor: In this case, a permanently fixed reflector (e.g. a small metal plate is mounted opposite the BERO. The operating range is adjusted to this reflector. If the path between the BERO and the reflector is interrupted, the sensor no longer detects the reflector and this triggers a change in the signal at the switching output. Set operating range Reflector detected, switching output not active Set operating range Reflector hidden by object, switching output active NSD0_0103 Synchronization In compact ranges 0, II, III and M18, several devices can be synchronized with each other by simply interconnecting the synchronization outputs of the devices (Pin for NO function, Pin 4 for NC function). Up to 10 devices can be synchronized (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0). This allows the sensors to be mounted extremely close to each other in many cases without causing mutual interference. Advantages: 7 No additional wiring overheads, simply connect the enable inputs of the individual BEROs. 7 Fast response, because every BERO is constantly active. Disadvantages 7 The object cannot be assigned to a particular BERO. Example Two Sonar BEROs are mounted at a clearance e that is smaller than the minimum clearance (see Mounting guidelines ). An object is located in their common sound field. The echo from B can reach B1 by reflection (GB). Mutual interference can occur. The object is detected from the two echoes E1 and E by Sonar BEROs B1 and B. If the two devices are synchronized, there /14 Siemens FS

15 A may be no mutual interference, because for example, echo E1 arrives after echo E at BERO B. The devices only ever respond to the first echo. * * Multiplex function External multiplex mode The fourth connection can be used as an external enabling input. This can be used to switch the Sonar BERO to active or inactive using an external control without the need to switch the supply voltage on and off. An external multiplex mode can be configured when Sonar BEROs have to be switched on and off in sequence through the enabling input. In this case, it is ensured that the Sonar BEROs will not interfere with each other. In contrast to internal multiplex mode, more than 10 Sonar BEROs can be operated in multiplex mode. Connection of the enable input: Sonar BERO active, Enable input XI at L+ or open. Sonar BERO inactive, Enable input XI at 0 to 3 V DC Advantages: 7 Reliable protection against mutual interference. 7 An object can be assigned to a BERO. Disadvantages 7 Additional connection overheads (e.g. a PLC). 7 Longer response time than for a synchronization circuit because each BERO is only active briefly and then has to wait until all the other BEROs in the circuit have emitted. Example: Recognition of narrow objects Narrow objects are to be recognized and it shall be determined whether one, two or no objects are present. * - - / * - 5, ' " = BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Introduction Internal multiplex mode The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges 0, II, III and M18 can be interconnected to form a network. Up to 10 devices (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0) can be operated in series or parallel (see "Synchronization"). No additional electronics is required. The enable inputs of all the BEROs are simply connected together. On programming, each device is informed about the number of BEROs in the network as well as its own position (address) in the network. When they have been wired up and the supply voltage has been connected, the BEROs automatically operate in multiplex mode. SONPROG PC interface Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device and SONPROG the relevant software, the Sonar BEROs of compact ranges II, III and M18 can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements. The device is an interface for the following tasks: Checking the parameters of the Sonar BERO Modifying the parameters of the Sonar BERO Aligning the Sonar BERO to the application. This enables a Sonar BERO to be optimized specifically for an application. The adjustments found can be saved or printed out to facilitate maintenance and documentation of the equipment. When a Sonar BERO has been replaced, the new device can be programmed with the saved data quickly and easily. No new adjustments are necessary. The main parameters that can be set are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Diffuse or reflex sensor. For a detailed description of the possible settings, see "SONPROG PC interface" A special function mode enables the Sonar BERO to be adapted to applications with level measurements. See "Compact range for pump control". Adjustment with potentiometers The potentiometers are used to select the required limits (min. or max.) of the switching range. / * * - 5, ' # = In this example, echo GB would cause BERO B1 to mistakenly detect an object. Synchronization of the BEROs would not help here because echo pulse E would not arrive until after echo GB at BERO B1 and a BERO only ever detects the first echo. In this example, a PLC must be used to switch cyclically to and fro between the two BEROs. Siemens FS /15

16 Sonar BEROs Introduction Circuit diagrams Synchronization NO function NC function External multiplex mode NO function NC function Internal multiplex mode (analog output) NO function NC function Characteristics Sound cones The following diagrams are the results of measurements with Sonar BEROs, with their production-dependent scatter, at room conditions (0 C). Standard reflectors moved radially are detected within the possible sensing range by the Sonar BEROs. The diagrams apply to the individual types of sensor for the defined reflectors and for larger reflectors. Measurement 1 with an aligned object, with the most optimum reflection keep environment free of objects which should not be detected. Measurement with an object which has partially aligned surfaces detection of round materials and plates with rounded edges. Measurement 3 with an object with a plane surface moving perpendicularly to the sound cone detection of plane surfaces and edges. Defined reflectors: Measurements 1, 3: plane object - cm cm, for sensors with sensing ranges up to 130 cm - 10 cm 10 cm, for sensors with larger sensing ranges Measurement : cylindrical object, 8 cm diameter. The following pages show the sound cones for the following designs: Compact range 0 Sonar thru-beam sensor Compact range M18 Compact range I, II, III (M30). /16 Siemens FS

17 Sonar BEROs Introduction Compact range 0, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Compact range 0, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 K 65 compact form, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Sonar thru-beam sensor, sensing ranges cm, cm, cm Receiver angle 0 Variable receiver angle, optimally aligned Siemens FS /17

18 Sonar BEROs Introduction M18 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity /18 Siemens FS

19 Sonar BEROs Introduction M18 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Siemens FS /19

20 Sonar BEROs Introduction M18S compact range, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E? $ " " $ # / 5 -! E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K # #!! # " " # > A? J@ EI J=? A E? * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E?!! # / 5 - " E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K # #!! # " " # > A? J@ EI J=? A E? M18S and K08 compact range, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E? $ " " $ E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K / 5 - #! " # $ > A? J@ EI J=? A E? * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E? # "!! " # # / 5 - $ E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K # #!! # " " # > A? J@ EI J=? A E? M18S compact range, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), Measurement (plane object), attenuation 0 attenuation 0 * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E? # # # # E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K / 5 - % " $ & " > A? J@ EI J=? A E? * - 4 > A? J 5 A M E@ JD E? & $ " " $ & / 5 - & E E K ) L A H= C A = N E K " $ & " > A? J@ EI J=? A E? /0 Siemens FS

21 Sonar BEROs Introduction Compact ranges I to III, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range I. Siemens FS /1

22 Sonar BEROs Introduction Compact ranges I to III, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Insufficient sensitivity Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range I. / Siemens FS

23 Sonar BEROs Introduction Compact ranges I to III, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range I. Siemens FS /3

24 Sonar BEROs Introduction Compact ranges I to III, sensing range cm Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 4 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 4 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 4 Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 6 Measurement (cylindrical object), attenuation 6 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 6 Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range I. /4 Siemens FS

25 Further information Active surface The active surface of an ultrasonic proximity switch is the surface at which the ultrasound is emitted and received (IEC). Reference axis The reference axis is the axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC). Sensing range The sensing range is understood to be the range within which the operating distance can be set (IEC). With the Sonar BEROs, this is a range from 5 cm to 10 m depending on the type. The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only detected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes cannot be evaluated for physical reasons. Operating distance The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Rated operating distance s n The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). Real operating distance s r The real operating distance is the operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC). Accuracy The accuracy is the permissible error that exists as the difference between the true distance and the indicated value. The accuracy of a Sonar BERO depends on internal tolerances as well as certain physical parameters of the air such as humidity, atmospheric pressure and air movement. These parameters influence the sound propagation time and therefore the measured value received. Atmospheric pressure Any other atmospheric changes at a permanent site will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. Between sea level and 3000 m altitude, the speed of sound is reduced by less than 1 %. Sound propagation is not possible in a vacuum. Air humidity At room temperature and at lower temperatures, the humidity will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. At higher temperatures, the speed of sound increases with humidity. Air temperature The sound propagation time is dependent on the air temperature. An air temperature of 0 C is used as the reference variable here. The speed of sound changes with air temperature by 0.17 %/K. This temperature dependent change in sound propagation time means that as the temperature increases, the distance to the object appears to become shorter. A change in temperature of, for example, +10 C results in a change in the speed of sound of approximately % and therefore a change in the operating distance of %. Gas types The Sonar BERO is designed for operation in atmospheric air. If it is operated in other gases, different values for the speed of BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Introduction sound and attenuation can result in significant measurement errors and even malfunction (e.g. in carbon dioxide). Air currents Changes to the speed of sound as a result of constant changes in the flow direction and flow velocity of the air cannot be quantified by means of a generally applicable formula. High-temperature objects, such as glowing metal cause air turbulence. This will scatter or deflect the ultrasound. An echo will not be generated that can be evaluated. The measured results are not affected by, e.g.: Precipitation Average levels of precipitation in the form of rain or snow will not adversely affect the functionality of the Sonar BERO. The transducer surface should not, however, be wetted. Dewing is permissible. Spray paint This has no determinable effect on the functioning of the Sonar BERO. To prevent any detrimental effect on the sensitivity of the transducer, however, the spray paint must not be allowed to settle on the active transducer surface. External sound External sound is distinguished from the system-specific echoes and does not usually cause malfunctions. Repeat accuracy R The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance s r at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 3 C (± 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The repeat accuracy of the Sonar BERO is 0.15 % of full-scale. Siemens FS /5

26 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Compact ranges I to III Overview Version with swivel sensor These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact ranges I to III. They are particularly suitable for applications where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations. M30 form with fixed sensor The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges I, II and III are ready-touse all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjustment or programming capability. Design Standard version In the standard version, the devices have a permanently installed sensor. Version with separate sensor M30 form with swivel sensor The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 100 to the cylinder axis. Passive reflector With the Sonar BEROs of compact ranges I to III, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories"). Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are perpendicular to the Sonar BERO (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm. M30 form with separate sensor Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG6. 1, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in devices of type 3RG6. 13 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 mm in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of 1.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. /6 Siemens FS

27 Sonar BEROs Compact ranges I to III Functions Range definition and adjustability Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog output to change state. The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output. Sonar BERO Sound cone Object Sound cone Blind zone Initial value (adustable) Set operating or analog range (LED lit) Sensing range Final value (adjustable) Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar BERO will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar BERO and the reflector even those that absorb sound. Thru-beam sensors. (Compact ranges II and III only) The Sonar BERO only evaluates whether or not an object is located between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor. Active measurement system The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal is evaluated in order to determine the distance between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor. The system is insensitive to objects in the measurement path as long as they do not totally shield the ultrasonic pulses of the emitter from the receiver. Programming For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact ranges II and III can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. The proximity switches can also be ordered with non-standard values. These values must be specified in plain text on ordering. Type 3RG60., 3RG61. 3RG60 0.3, 3RG RG60 0.5, 3RG RG60 0.4, 3RG RG61 76 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H mm Repeat accuracy R mm ± 0,45 ± ± 5 ± 9 ± 15 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e NO contact ma NC contact ma 150 or 300 (see Selection and ordering data ) 150 No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 50 Max. 75 Ultrasonic frequency f khz Switching frequency Hz ,5 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 IP65 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C Siemens FS /7

28 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Compact range III Overview Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable using potentiometers, with SONPROG 1 ) or per teach-in Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Analog output Connection through M1, 5-pin connector 1) Parameters can be preset to non-standard values. A programming supplement will be charged in this case per unit. Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Analog output Order No. cm ma pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO ma 3RG61 1 3BF NO ma 3RG BF NO ma 3RG BF NO ma 3RG BF NO ma 3RG BH00 3RG NC ma 3RG61 1 3BE NC ma 3RG BE NC ma 3RG BE NC ma 3RG BE NC ma 3RG BG00 3RG NO ma 3RG61 1 3CF NO ma 3RG CF NO ma 3RG CF NO ma 3RG CF NO ma 3RG CH00 3RG NC ma 3RG61 1 3CE NC ma 3RG CE NC ma 3RG CE NC ma 3RG CE NC ma 3RG CG00 3RG NO V 3RG61 1 3GF NO V 3RG GF NO V 3RG GF NO V 3RG GF NO V 3RG GH NC V 3RG61 1 3GE NC V 3RG GE NC V 3RG GE NC V 3RG GE NC V 3RG GG00 /8 Siemens FS

29 Sonar BEROs Compact range III Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Analog output Order No. cm ma pnp Swivel sensor 3RG NO ma 3RG61 1 3BF NO ma 3RG61 3 3BF NO ma 3RG61 5 3BF NO ma 3RG61 4 3BF NC ma 3RG61 3BE NC ma 3RG61 3 3BE NC ma 3RG61 5 3BE NC ma 3RG61 4 3BE NO ma 3RG61 3CF NO ma 3RG61 3 3CF NO ma 3RG61 5 3CF NO ma 3RG61 4 3CF NC ma 3RG61 3CE NC ma 3RG61 3 3CE NC ma 3RG61 5 3CE NC ma 3RG61 4 3CE NO V 3RG61 3GF NO V 3RG61 3 3GF NO V 3RG61 5 3GF NO V 3RG61 4 3GF NC V 3RG61 3GE NC V 3RG61 3 3GE NC V 3RG61 5 3GE NC V 3RG61 4 3GE00 Separate sensor 3RG NO ma 3RG61 1 3BF NO ma 3RG BF NC ma 3RG61 1 3BE NC ma 3RG BE NO ma 3RG61 1 3CF NO ma 3RG CF NC ma 3RG61 1 3CE NC ma 3RG CE NO V 3RG61 1 3GF NO V 3RG GF NC V 3RG61 1 3GE NC V 3RG GE01 Accessories SONPROG interface unit, 3RX4 000 AC V, DC 4 V Siemens FS /9

30 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Compact range II Overview Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable using potentiometers, with SONPROG 1 ) or per teach-in Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - 1 or switching outputs - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M1 connector - 4-pole (with 1 output) - 5-pole (with outputs) 1) Parameters can be preset to non-standard values. A programming supplement will be charged in this case per unit. Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Frequency output Order No. cm ma pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 1 3AF NO 3RG AF NO 3RG AF NO 3RG AF00 3RG NC 3RG60 1 3AE NC 3RG AE NC 3RG AE NC 3RG AE00 3RG NO 3RG60 1 3AH NO 3RG AH NO 3RG AH NO 3RG AH00 3RG NC 3RG60 1 3AG NC 3RG AG NC 3RG AG NC 3RG AG Hz 3RG60 1 3RS Hz 3RG RS Hz 3RG RS Hz 3RG RS00 Swivel sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3AF NO 3RG60 3 3AF NO 3RG60 5 3AF NO 3RG60 4 3AF NC 3RG60 3AE NC 3RG60 3 3AE NC 3RG60 5 3AE NC 3RG60 4 3AE00 Separate sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 1 3AF NO 3RG AF NC 3RG60 1 3AE NC 3RG AE01 Accessories SONPROG interface unit, AC V, DC 4 V 3RX4 000 /30 Siemens FS

31 Sonar BEROs Compact range I Overview Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Adjustable through potentiometers Solid-state output: - Switching output Connection through M1 connector, 3-pin or 4-pin Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Analog output Order No. cm ma pnp Fixed sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 1 3AD NO 3RG AD NO 3RG AD NO 3RG AD00 3RG NC 3RG60 1 3AC NC 3RG AC NC 3RG AC NC 3RG AC00 3RG RG Swivel sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 3AD NO 3RG60 3 3AD NO 3RG60 5 3AD NO 3RG60 4 3AD NC 3RG60 3AC NC 3RG60 3 3AC NC 3RG60 5 3AC NC 3RG60 4 3AC00 Separate sensor 3RG NO 3RG60 1 3AD NO 3RG AD NC 3RG60 1 3AC NC 3RG AC01 Siemens FS /31

32 Sonar BEROs Configuring for compact ranges I to III With fixed sensor 3RG RG M 30x1,5 3RG RG , SW 36 NSD00778 M 1x1 80 7, ,5 With swivel sensor 3RG RG NSD SW M 30x1,5 7,3 10,5 M 30x1,5 SW 36 NSD00779 M 1x1 99 7, ,5 M 30x1,5 SW 36 3RG RG NSD SW M 30x1,5 7,3 10,5 47, NSD00780 M 1x1 M 1x1 M 1x1 M 1x1 With separate sensor Spherical 3RG RG RG ,5 160 NSD , ,5 SW 36 5 M 30x1,5 7,3 10,5 NSD /3 Siemens FS

33 Sonar BEROs Configuring for compact ranges I to III Circuit diagrams Compact range I View from rear onto device Compact range II 5, % # ' 7! " : 1 K JF K J H= = C K JF K J NO or frequency output Compact range II with switching outputs 5, % $ 7! " # : 1 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J Compact range III 5, % $ " 7! " # : 1 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J ) = C K JF K J 5, % $ # 7! " # 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J : 1 ) = C K JF K J + Siemens FS /33

34 Sonar BEROs M18 compact range Overview M18 form The Sonar BEROs of compact range M18 are ready-to-use all-inone units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor Adjustable using potentiometers, with SONPROG interface device or per teach-in Foreground and background suppression Synchronization capability, multiplex operation Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Analog output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M1, 4-pin connector Design The devices of compact range M18 are always supplied with permanently installed sensors. Functions The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs. Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchronized with each other through the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode. For a detailed description, see Compact ranges I to III. Programming For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact range M18 can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. The proximity switches can also be ordered with non-standard values. These values must be specified in plain text on ordering. Type 3RG6 3 3RG6 33 Sensing range cm Standard target cm 1 1 Differential travel H mm 10 Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 ± Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 0 %) Rated operating current I e ma 150 No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 60 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz 5 4 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C /34 Siemens FS

35 Sonar BEROs M18 compact range Accessories Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output cm ma pnp Analog/ frequency output Order No NO 3RG6 3 3AB NO 3RG6 33 3AB NC 3RG6 3 3AA NC 3RG6 33 3AA ma 3RG6 3 3LS ma 3RG6 33 3LS ma 3RG6 3 3TS ma 3RG6 33 3TS V 3RG6 3 3JS V 3RG6 33 3JS Hz 3RG6 3 3RS Hz 3RG6 33 3RS00 SONPROG interface unit, AC V, DC 4 V 3RX4 000 Dimension drawing 3RG A.00 M 18x1 3RG S00 M 18x1 104 (-3) 65 SW 4 4 7,5 90,5 104 (-3) 65 SW ,5 Poti NSD00776 LED (4x) NSD00775 LED (4x) Circuit diagram 5, % # ' 7! " : 1 K JF K J View from rear onto device H= = C K JF K J Siemens FS /35

36 Sonar BEROs M18 S compact range Overview M18 S form The Sonar BEROs of compact range M18 S are ready-to-use allin-one units with a cylindrical enclosure. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Adjustable per teach-in (only with switching output) Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO! Connection through M1, 4-pin connector Design Compact range M18 S can be supplied with an aligned sensor head or an angled sensor head. The small physical size of the sensors makes them ideal for applications where space is limited. Functions Available as diffuse sensors and reflex sensors. The sensors can be supplied with switching or frequency outputs. Due to their wide range and a minimized close range, they are suitable for a wide variety of applications. Programming The sensors with a switching output can be set through the device terminals by means of a teach-in function. Setting is not possible for sensors with a frequency output. Evaluation can be performed in a PLC or in a LOGO! mini PLC. Type 3RG64. 3RG64.1 3RG Sensing range mm or or or Adjustment range mm or or or Standard target cm Differential travel H mm 10 or 10 or 10 or 3 Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 (frequency output ±.5) ±,5) Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e ma 150 No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 0 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C /36 Siemens FS

37 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs M18 S compact range Straight sensor Angled sensor Accessories Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output cm ma pnp Operating mode/ frequency output Order No NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 3 3AB NO Diffuse sensor 3RG AB NO Diffuse sensor 3RG AB NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 3 3BB NO Reflex sensor 3RG BB NO Reflex sensor 3RG BB Hz 3RG64 3 3RS Hz Hz 3RG RS Hz Hz Hz 3RG RS NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 3AB NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 1 3AB NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 3 3AB NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 3BB NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 1 3BB NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 3 3BB Hz 3RG64 3RS Hz Hz 3RG64 1 3RS Hz Hz Hz 3RG64 3 3RS00 Teach-In adapter 3RX RG64. (angled sensor) 5 A I E C I K HB=? A & #! 5, ' & N 5 9 " " -, 3RG64 3. (straight sensor) N Circuit diagrams 5, & 7! " HA G K A? O K JF K J - 6 ` K JF K J View from rear onto device Siemens FS /37

38 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Compact range for pump control Area of application Automatic filling A Sonar BERO with NC function is used for this purpose. The fill level falls and moves away from the Sonar BERO: The switching level remains inactive as long as the falling fill level has not reached the minimum fill height. When the minimum level is reached, the Sonar BERO switches the pump on and automatic filling is performed until the maximum level is reached. During filling, the switching output remains active. 5 = H* - 4 K F * A M18 and M30 forms (compact range II) The Sonar BEROs of forms M30 and M18 with a switching output are suitable for pump controls, e.g. for applications with automated filling or emptying. In the case of the M30 form, the standard device with a fixed sensor head as well as the devices with separate or swivel sensor heads can be used. Programming Functions Automatic emptying A Sonar BERO with NO function is used for this purpose. The fill level rises and approaches the Sonar BERO: The switching output is inactive while the level approaches the Sonar BERO before the maximum fill height is reached. When the maximum level is reached, the Sonar BERO switches the pump on and automatic emptying is performed until the minimum level is reached (dry running protection). During emptying, the switching output remains active. K H= E E C K F 5, & $ K F 5 = H* - 4 * A = N BEA L A 5 J= HJ B F A H= JE C H= C A E BEA L A B F A H= JE C H= C A K F 5, & $ = N BEA L A 5 J= HJ B F A H= JE C H= C A K F BEE C E BEA L A B F A H= JE C H= C A The devices can be switched to fill level mode by means of the SONPROG interface unit. The existing potentiometers, SONPROG software or teach-in keys of the SONPROG interface device can be used to set the lower and upper limits of the operating range. With the M30 form, both the lower and upper limit of the operating range can be set using the potentiometers, but only the lower limit can be set with the M18 form; the start is fixed in the latter case. It is important to set a mean value. Mean value generation over 100 measured values is recommended as standard. The required parameters can also be set at the factory. For this purpose, the Order No. must be supplemented by " Z". Furthermore, "Z = fill level software" and the required parameters should be specified in plain text: NO (automatic emptying) or NC (automatic filling) Fill level limits adjustable by potentiometers or permanently programmed, then: - Lower limit of operating range (maximum fill level) - Upper limit of operating range (minimum fill level) Mean value. /38 Siemens FS

39 Overview The Sonar BEROs of K 08 compact form are ready-to-use all-inone units with a rectangular metal enclosure. 3 versions with different operating modes: - Diffuse sensors with background suppression - Relex sensor - Thru-beam sensor: Diffuse sensor and reflex sensor: BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs K08 compact form - Up to 6 devices can be synchronized - Adjustment per teach-in Solid-state outputs: - 1 pnp and 1 npn switching output - NO/NC adjustable Connection through M1 connector, 5-pin, rotatable by 90 Type 3RG CC00 3RG DC00 3RG SB00 Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor: Sensing range mm Adjustment range mm Standard target cm Differential travel H mm 10 Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 ± 1 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e ma 150 No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 5 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Operational voltage Green LED Enclosure material Metal Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C Cubic form Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Operating mode Order No. mm ma pnp + npn B 3RG CC00 B 3RG DC00 3RG NN00 B 3RG SB00 Circuit diagrams LED YE LED GN M 1 1 4,5 5, & 7 I M EJ? D E C K JF K JI 5! " 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J # 5 M EJ? D E C K JF K J View from rear onto device 15,6 4, selectable NO/NC contact each Diffuse sensor selectable Reflex sensor NO/NC contact each Thru-beam sensor emitter NO contact each Thru-beam sensor receiver Transducer M 4 65 NSD0_008 Siemens FS /39

40 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs Compact range 0 Overview Compact range 0 with separate and fixed sensors The Sonar BEROs of compact range 0 are all-in-one units with a rectangular enclosure, and are ready for connection. They are available with two sensing ranges. Operates as diffuse sensor Adjustable by potentiometer Can be synchronized Temperature compensation Solid-state outputs: - Switching output - Analog output Connection through M1 connector, Type F Design The devices of compact range 0 are supplied in the standard version with permanently installed sensors. The devices of compact range 0 can also be supplied with separate sensors. Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces. The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure separated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG63 4, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in devices of type 3RG63 43 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 5 mm in both cases. Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of approximately 1.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the enclosure of compact range 0 is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure. Functions Compact range 0 is designed for simple applications. The devices are only suitable for operation as diffuse sensors. The sensors can be supplied with analog outputs. The end of operating range or analog range can be set using a potentiometer. Up to 6 devices can be synchronized with each other. Type 3RG63 4 3RG63 43 Sensing range cm Standard target cm 1 1 Differential travel H mm 5 10 Repeat accuracy R mm ± 0.45 ± 1.5 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 30 %) Rated operating current I e ma 100 No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 35 Ultrasonic frequency khz Switching frequency f Hz 8 5 Response time ms Power-up delay t v ms 7 7 Switching status display Yellow LED Enclosure material CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C /40 Siemens FS

41 Sonar BEROs Compact range 0 Fixed sensor Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Analog output Order No. cm ma pnp NO 3RG63 4 3AB NO 3RG AB NC 3RG63 4 3AA NC 3RG AA V 3RG63 4 3JK V 3RG JK00 Separate sensor NO 3RG63 4 3AB NO 3RG AB NC 3RG63 4 3AA NC 3RG AA V 3RG63 4 3JK V 3RG JK01 3RG RG Type A B 3RG M18 SW 4 3RG M30 SW 36 Circuit diagrams 5, % # ' 7! " : 1 K JF K J View from rear onto device H= = C K JF K J Siemens FS /41

42 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs 3SG16 compact form Overview Functions Range definition and adjustability The Sonar BERO outputs a signal while an object is located in the set operating range or inhibit range within an aperture angle of approximately 5 degrees (see figure below). The sensing range between 0. and 1 m is subdivided into 8 equal operating ranges of 0.1 m. Each operating range B1 to B8 can be selected using a connector in the terminal compartment. The Sonar BERO signals with one output and one LED in each case whether objects are located in the set operating range or in the so-called inhibit range that precedes it. With the help of the supplied programming plug, two to eight of the separate operating ranges (B1 to B8) can be combined to form an extended operating range. One programming plug is required for each operating range which can in each case only be connected to the immediately adjacent range. The plug is fitted to a pin connector in the terminal compartment of the device. The possible pin assignments are shown in the cover of the terminal compartment. 3SG16 compact form The Sonar BERO in compact form for DC is a complete, factoryassembled unit, ready for connection. It cannot be combined with devices from the compact ranges and modular range. Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor Foreground and background suppression Adjustable using plug-in jumpers Solid-state outputs: - switching outputs Terminal compartment with screw terminals Design All components are located into a single box-shaped enclosure. The ultrasonic converter and the terminal compartment are arranged on the same enclosure level. The electrical connections are made with screw terminals in the terminal compartment; cable entry is through an M0 cable gland. Aligning unit To make it easier to align the Sonar BERO with the object to be detected, a 3SX6 87 aligning unit is available. This unit allows swiveling about a horizontal and a vertical axis with an angle of rotation in each case of up to 30. Sound cone approx. 5 Blind zone Sensing range (selectable operating ranges via jumpers in terminal compartment) B1 B B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Set operating range e. g. 0.8 to 0.9 m Output 1 (green LED) 0 0, 0,8 0,9 1 m Blocking range: Output (red LED) Operating modes Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor The Sonar BERO switches when an object enters the sound cone from any direction, output 14 (NO) outputs a 1-signal if the object is located within a set operating range (B1 to B8). Output 4 (SX) outputs a 1-signal if the object is in the inhibit range. Objects in the blind zone do not cause a utilizable signal change on outputs 14 and 4. Reflex sensor If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the ultrasonic beam will be interrupted by all objects in the inhibit range even those that absorb sound. In this case, output 14 (NO) changes to the 0-signal. In the case of reflective objects in the inhibit range, output 4 (SX) changes to the 1-signal at the same time. Series and parallel connection Series connection of the Sonar BERO (terminal or 4) is possible. The voltage drops must, however, be taken into account. Parallel connection of the outputs is also possible. If the Sonar BEROs that are in parallel are connected to different power supply units, the outputs must be decoupled by diodes (diodes for 300 ma, 150 to 300 V control voltage, recommended diode type, e.g. 1N4004). NSD0_00754 /4 Siemens FS

43 Sonar BEROs 3SG16 compact form Sensing range cm Standard target cm Differential travel H mm 10 Repeat accuracy R mm ± Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 30 %) No-load supply current I 0 ma < 60 Switching output Rated operating current I e ma 150 Voltage drop V Residual current ma 0.01 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Hz 4 Response time ms 10 Power-up delay t v ms 80 Switching status display Yellow LED Enclosure material CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Connection Order No. cm ma pnp NO Terminal compartment 3SG BJ87 Accessories Aligning unit 3SX Æ5, NSD ,3x5,3 LED 19,5 Sensor connector can be retrofitted Circuit diagram Siemens FS /43

44 BERO Proximity Switches Sonar BEROs K65 compact form Area of application Functions Sensors with switching or analog output Within the sensing range, the fill level of a container is detected. If the fill level reaches one of the two switching thresholds (S min, S max ), the corresponding output is set. On emptying or filling, the switching outputs remain set in accordance with the differential travel (H min, H max ). This is signaled by the corresponding LED. If the level is located between the two operating ranges, both outputs are reset (see "Definition of the ranges"). 5 = H* = N 5 E * A 5 = N 0 = N K65 compact form The Sonar BEROs of the K 65 compact form are ready-to-use complete self-contained units. They operate with a DC supply. Their enclosure design and function makes them ideal for level applications in small containers. The devices feature two switching outputs (S min and S max ) to which different distances can be assigned. This allows, for example, the minimum and maximum fill level in a tank to be evaluated. The values are set using the SONPROG interface device or by means of automatic alignment (teach-in function). Design All components are located in a box-shaped enclosure with rounded edges. The ultrasonic converter is mounted in the enclosure slightly recessed in the enclosure. The integrated encirculating sealing ring allows the Sonar BERO to be used as a plug with integrated level measuring. The tank opening must have a minimum diameter of 6 mm. It can be fixed to the tank by means of two M5 screws. The electric connection is made using a 5-pin connector with M1 thread. 5 = N 5 E 0 E 5 = N 5 E Definition of the ranges 5 E 5 A I E C H= C A 5, Blind zone Objects at close range cause fault signals, so the user must install the sensor such that the fill level cannot enter close range. Programming For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of SONPROG compact form K 65 can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device. The main parameters that can be changed are: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog range Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Multiplex function Temperature compensation Susceptibility. The proximity switches can also be ordered with non-standard values. These values must be specified in plain text on ordering. /44 Siemens FS

45 Sonar BEROs K65 compact form Type 3RG6 5 3RG6 53 3RG6 55 Sensing range cm Standard target cm Switching threshold S max cm S min cm Differential travel H H max (adjustable) cm 5 10 H min (adjustable) cm Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at V susceptibility falls by approx. 0%) No-load supply current I 0 ma Max. 60 Switching output Rated operating current I e ma 150 Voltage drop V Switching element function S max NO contact Switching element function S min NO/NC programmable Ultrasonic frequency khz Measuring time ms Displays Switching status yellow LEDs Operational voltage Green LED Enclosure material CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature During operation During storage Accessories Sensing range Rated operational Switching output current cm ma pnp Analog/ frequency output Connection Order No NO M1 connector 3RG6 5 3AH NO M1 connector 3RG6 53 3AH NO M1 connector 3RG6 55 3AH NO ma M1 connector 3RG6 5 3BF NO ma M1 connector 3RG6 53 3BF NO ma M1 connector B 3RG6 55 3BF NO ma M1 connector 3RG6 5 3CF NO ma M1 connector 3RG6 53 3CF NO ma M1 connector 3RG6 55 3CF NO V M1 connector 3RG6 5 3GF NO V M1 connector B 3RG6 53 3GF NO V M1 connector B 3RG6 55 3GF NO Hz M1 connector 3RG6 5 3RS NO Hz M1 connector 3RG6 53 3RS NO 1, Hz M1 connector 3RG6 55 3RS00 SONPROG interface unit, AC V, DC 4 V 3RX4 000 Teach-In adapter 3RX4 010 Siemens FS /45

46 Sonar BEROs K65 compact form Circuit diagrams Sensors with switching output Connection Automatic alignment View from rear onto device View from rear onto device XI must be connected to L for the automatic alignment. /46 Siemens FS

47 Sonar BEROs Sonar thru-beam sensor Overview Sonar thru-beam sensor The sonar thru-beam sensor comprises an ultrasonic emitter and a receiver. The emitter and receiver circuits are installed in separate box-shaped enclosures of molded plastic. Operation as thru-beam sensor 3 measurement ranges can be set Solid-state output: - Switching output Connection - With 3 m cable - With M8 connector, 4-pole - With M1 connector, 4-pole Functions Thru-beam sensor mode The emitter of the sonar thru-beam sensor emits a narrowly focused continuous tone in the direction of the receiver. The receiver located opposite evaluates this ultrasonic signal. Interruption of the tone by an object will cause the output signal to change. Adjustment of sensitivity The sensitivity can be adjusted at the receiver module at terminal (NO version) or 4 (NC version). XI Switching frequency Hz Not connected 100 < 150 L 150 < 80 L+ 00 < 40 Emitter/receiver distance cm Object detection The minimum size of detectable objects depends on the distance between emitter and receiver. If the distance is less than 40 cm, objects cm or larger will be detected. The gap with between two objects must be at least 3 mm. If the distance is shorter, gaps of <1 mm can even be detected. At maximum distance, objects greater than 4 cm in size can be detected. In this case the gaps between the objects must be >1 cm. Arrangement Type 3RG6 43.P (receiver) 3RG6 43.N (emitter) Sensing range cm Standard target Up to 40 cm cm Over 40 cm cm 1 1 Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple) Rated operating current I e ma 100 No-load supply current I 0 ma < 0 < 30 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Up to 40 cm Hz 00 Up to 80 cm Hz 150 Up to 150 cm Hz 100 Response time Up to 40 cm ms Up to 80 cm ms 1.5 Up to 150 cm ms 1 Power-up delay t v ms < 40 Status indication Green LED Enclosure material CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C Siemens FS /47

48 Sonar BEROs Sonar thru-beam sensor Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Connection Order No. cm ma pnp NO Cable, 3 m 3RG6 43 0PB NC Cable, 3 m 3RG6 43 0PA Emitter Cable, 3 m 3RG6 43 0NN NO M 8 connector 3RG6 43 7PB NC M 8 connector 3RG6 43 7PA Emitter M 8 connector 3RG6 43 7NN NO M1 connector 3RG6 43 3PB NC M1 connector 3RG6 43 3PA Emitter M1 connector 3RG6 43 0NN00 3RG RG , 3RG Circuit diagrams 5, % #! = * * 7 * 9 0 "! " : * View from rear onto device 4 A? A EL A H + /48 Siemens FS

49 Sonar BEROs Double-layer sheet monitoring Overview The spacing between the emitter and receiver must be at least 0 mm and can be up to 60 mm. Precise alignment is essential (±1 ). The operating range is reduced if they are not aligned along the axis. * # # ) $ " 5 -, 5,! = Sensor mounting Double-layer sheet monitoring with separate sensors The 3RX 10 Sonar BERO for double-layer sheet monitoring comprises one signal evaluator and two Sonar sensors (emitter and receiver). Reliable detection of multiple layers of paper, plastic sheets or metal foil Measuring range from 0 g paper to 1100 g card Manual or automatic offset Sonar sensors in M18 enclosure Short-circuit proof electronic outputs (pnp) Connection through M1 connector. Design The emitter and receiver sensors are of the same type and must be mounted at an angle of 30 (±10 ) or 5 to the vertical. The setting is made using the internal S switch. If the system is operated at an inclination angle of 5 to 0, the S switch (operating mode) must be set to position "1". The object to be detected must be located approximately 5 to 15 mm above the emitter. A wider mounting angle increases the flutter range, e. g. at an angle of 40, fluttering within 60 % of the measuring range is permitted. Functions These devices are used mainly for monitoring sheets of paper as well as plastic and metal film. Each layer is compared to the stored reference value and indicated as a single or double layer accordingly. The 3RX 10 signal evaluator continuously signals the situation between the sonar sensors at the two outputs A1 and A. Output A1 "Single layer" remains active as long as only one layer is located between the sensors. Output A "Double layer" is activated as soon as two or more layers are detected between the sensors. Two LEDs also indicate the status of the outputs. The yellow LED A1 indicates a single layer and the red LED A indicates a double layer. Programming The signal evaluator can be set to two different modes , ), - 1 / - 4 ) ; 5 -, ! 4 : ) ) 7 *! 8, + -, , ) -, ) 7 6 5, ' = Manual setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "1". The sensor is set up for the material to be sensed either by pressing the "SET" button on the top of the device or by applying a control command to the "SET" input of the M1 connector (pin 5). The value obtained remains stored until the setting procedure is repeated. The sensor is set by placing a single layer between the sonar sensors and activating the "SET" command. The 3RX 10 requires max. 100 ms for the setting; i.e. the "SET" key must be pressed for this time, or a "1" signal (> 6 V) must be present at pin 5. The green LED "SET" flashes during the setting. It lights up permanently following successful setting. Automatic setting Switch S1 (setting) is in position "0" (factory setting). User interface Setting can be performed as described above or automatically when a layer is fed in and the supply voltage is applied if a layer lies between the sensors at this moment. Automatic setting is performed when a layer is fed in following an interval of s during which a layer was not detected between the sonar sensors. Siemens FS /49

50 Sonar BEROs Double-layer sheet monitoring Sensing range mm Material strength (paper, cardboard) G Operational voltage (DC) V (including ± 10 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 ma < 75 Switching output Rated operating current I e ma 00 Voltage drop at 00 ma V < 3 Ultrasonic frequency khz 00 Switching frequency f Hz 100 Response time ms 5 Switching status display Red and yellow LEDs Enclosure material Evaluation unit Metal Sensor Brass, nickel-plated; epoxy resin converter surface Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature During operation C During storage C Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Connection Order No. cm ma pnp NO M1 connector 3RX 10 Evaluation unit Sensor /50 Siemens FS

51 Overview BERO Proximity Switches Accessories for Sonar BERO SONPROG interface device Parameters Operating range The commands "Lower limit of operating range" and "Upper limit of operating range" are used to define a window within the sensing range of the Sonar BERO. If an object enters the operating range, the switching output is active (with NO contact). If an object is outside the operating range, the switching output is not active. In the case of Sonar BEROs of compact range II with two switching outputs, the second switching output is active when an object is located between the blind zone and the operating range. Sonar BERO Sound cone Object Initial value (adustable) Set operating or analog range (LED lit) Final value (adjustable) Blind zone Sensing range PC with SONPROG interface device and Sonar BERO Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 PC interface device SONPROG and the relevant software, the following Sonar BEROs can be individually adapted to the respective application requirements: Compact ranges II and III Compact range M18 K 65 compact form. Scope of supply PC-Interface, Plug-in power supply Connecting leads to the PC and Sonar BERO SONPROG software for Windows. Functions The SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device allows the user to program several Sonar BEROs simultaneously. The lower and upper limit of the operating range can be saved at the click of a button for copying to other Sonar BEROs. For each Sonar BERO, the following parameters can be set: Lower and upper limit of the operating range Differential travel Switching function NO or NC Switching frequency Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic Analog characteristic, rising or falling End of close range End of sensing range Mean value generation Attenuation. The function can also be set for the device: Multiplex function Temperature compensation Function as diffuse or reflex sensor Fill level mode (see "Compact range for pump control"). The programmed values are saved in the Sonar BERO and are retained even without interface or after the supply voltage has been disconnected. The programmed values can be printed out and recorded. They will then be immediately available, for example, for series applications or for replacement of the Sonar BERO. Sound cone Differential travel The differential travel can be adjusted to move the switch-on point and the switch-off point at the limits of the operating range away from each other. This prevents output flutter and level control tasks can be solved elegantly. "! * - 4, EBBA HA JE= JH= L A, EBBA HA JE= JH= L A + J= E A H 5, ' = # % $ & 1)Inhibit range )Switching range 3)Sensing range 4)Blind zone 5)Switching output upper limit when level falls 6)Switching output upper limit when level rises 7)Switching output lower limit when level falls 8)Switching output lower limit when level rises Example: Fill level monitoring with adjustable differential travel Switching element function The function of the switching output that was set at the factory can be changed, e.g. from NO to NC. The pin assignments are not changed. This means that the switching output remains at pin 4 even if a device is changed from NO to NC function. Switching frequency The Sonar BERO can be switched over from standard switching frequency (in accordance with the technical specifications) and rapid switching frequency (3 times the standard value). Attention: A Sonar BERO with a rapid switching frequency is more sensitive to disturbance. Siemens FS /51

52 Accessories for Sonar BERO SONPROG interface device Analog distance measurement BEROs with an analog output can detect the distance to an object. This distance is converted to an analog output signal that is proportional to it ( V, ma or ma). The resolution of the analog output is at least 1 mm within the preset limits. 0 ma 4 ma P1 Initial value 50 cm P Final value 90 cm Rising characteristic Falling characteristic NSD0_01193 Teach-in All Sonar BEROs of compact ranges II, III and M18 can now be adjusted to the limits of the operating range by means of a teachin function. For this purpose, the Order No. must be supplemented by " 0DT0". Teach-in is activated with a Low signal (0 V) on terminal XI. This can be applied through a key or jumper; teach-in can also be made with an electronic signal (e.g. PLC output). The signal is non-time-critical; the duration must be longer than 150 ms. Various adjustments can be implemented using the SONPROG V.x software. The user can select which value is to be taught. In compact ranges II and III, the selection can also be made with the potentiometer (set using SONPROG) The following adjustments can be implemented using the SON- PROG V.x software: 0 cm Sensing range 130 cm Teach-in mode: - Enabled Example - Disabled Blind zone Teach-in mode (adjustable by potentiometer) for: - Start of range A value must not be set for the blind zone that is less than the minimum value. This is the time that the Sonar BERO requires to switch over from send to receive mode. - End of range M18 compact range The blind zone can be moved away from the Sonar BERO (i.e. For sensors with a switching output, the switching limit is taught increased) to permit interfering objects in the foreground to be that was specified in the SONPROG programming (setting as ignored. The interfering echo resulting from such an object is supplied: maximum switching limit). suppressed by extending the blind zone, and detection of the For sensors with an analog output, the analog limit is taught that desired object is possible again. The range of the Sonar BERO was specified in the SONPROG programming (setting as supplied: maximum analog value) can be reduced in this case because part of the echo from the object to be detected is suppressed. However, objects are still not permitted within the original blind zone. Compact ranges II and III It is important to ensure with this setting the object does not reflect ultrasound so well that double or triple echoes arise that compact range III, the analog limits are taught. For the compact range II, the switching limits are taught; for the give the impression of a more distant object. (a fault of this kind Teach-in procedure cannot occur during normal operation because only the first echo is accepted as valid). The LED flashes during teach-in. Sensing range During teach-in, evaluation is performed using the set mean value. Reducing the sensing range can enhance the resolution of the If no object is detected in the sensing range, teach-in remains Sonar BERO. With large sensing ranges, it is not possible to adjust some values in steps of one millimeter. The minimum resolu- active (LED flashes). On successful completion of a teach-in, the potentiometer for tion of a Sonar BERO is 1 mm. adjusting the switching range is disabled. Mean value generation The teach-in procedure can be repeated as often as required. Unfortunate reflective conditions or moving surfaces (e.g. in the case of moving liquids and bulk material on conveyors) can cause the measured values to change continuously which results in constant switching. The Sonar BERO allows a mean Type 3RX4 000 value to be generated from up to 55 measurements. Required hardware PC with VGA graphics card, Failed signals (when no object is in the sensing range) are ignored on mean-value generation. After each measurement, a Required software serial interface COM1 or COM MS-DOS Version 3.1 and higher mean value is generated immediately from the new measured Windows 3.X, Windows 95, 98 value and the stored number of old values. The response time of Windows NT the Sonar BERO is, therefore, not extended. A delay only occurs Operational voltage AC V, DC 4 V at the end of a measurement if the object is removed from the sensing range. This delay corresponds to the measurement cycle time multiplied by the saved number of mean values. Sensitivity (see Sound cones ) Software update on the Internet: The susceptibility of the receive amplifier is reduced here. Weakly reflecting objects at the edge of the sound cone are suppressed. It is also possible to reduce the size of the sound cone here electronically. The permitted values are 0 (maximum sensitivity) to 7 (minimum sensitivity). Design SONPROG interface device Order No. 3RX4 000 /5 Siemens FS

53 Accessories for Sonar BERO Mounting sets Form Order No. Aligning unit with mounting bracket for Sonar BERO M30 Swivel range approx. 0 around longitudinal axis of BERO. Following assignment, the BERO is screwed tight in the selected position. 3RX1 301 Aligning unit with mounting flange for Sonar BERO M30 Swivel range approx. 0 around longitudinal axis of BERO. Following assignment, the BERO is screwed tight in the selected position. 3RX1 30 Passive reflector for Sonar BERO M30 3RX1 910 d f NSD0101 Mounting clamp (molded plastic) for Sonar BERO, M18 form 3SX6 83 for Sonar BERO, M30 form 3SX6 84 e a g b c For dimensions, see page / Aligning unit for 3SG16 67 Sonar BERO 3SX6 87 NSD For plug-in connectors and extension cables see page /07. Siemens FS /53

54 Opto BEROs Summary of ranges Overview Functions Form Sensing range 50 mm 10 mm 150 mm 50 cm 60 cm 1 m 1. m m.5 m 4 m 6 m 1 m 15 m 50 m 70 m Diffuse sensors D 4, M5 5 cm M1 30 cm M18 P 30 cm K 0 50 cm M18 S K 1, K 1 R K 31 C40 60 cm 60 cm 60 cm 70 cm K m K 40 K 80 m m Diffuse sensor with background suppression K 0 M18 P M18 K 31 C cm 10 cm 1 cm 15 cm 5 cm K 80 1 m Laser L cm Sensors with fiber-optic conductors K 31 KL 40 K mm 80 mm 400 mm Diffuse sensor with analog output Laser L mm /54 Siemens FS

55 Opto BEROs Summary of ranges Operational voltage Output Connection Features Form Page DC UC pnp npn Relays AS-Interface Analog output M 8 connector M1 connector Cable Terminals AS-Interface with FK block Timer function Anti-interference function Test input Molded plastic Metal enclosure V D 4, M5 / V M1 / V M18 P / V K 0 / V M18 S / V K 1, K 1 R / V K 31 / V C40 / V K 30 / V K 40 / V V K 80 / V K 0 / V M18 P / V M18 / V K 31 / V C 40 / V V K 80 / V L 50 / V K 31 / V KL 40 / V K 30 / V L 50 /97 Siemens FS /55

56 Opto BEROs Summary of ranges Functions Form Sensing range 50 mm 10 mm 150 mm 50 cm 60 cm 1 m 1. m m.5 m 4 m 6 m 1 m 15 m 5 m 50 m Retroreflective sensor with M1 M18 S M18 P K m m m m K 1, K 1 R K 30 3 m 4 m K 40 C 40 K 80 6 m 6 m 6 m Laser L 50 1 m Light arrays 1.4 m Thru-beam sensor D 4, M5 M1 5 cm 4 m M18 S K 31 6 m 6 m M18 P K 30 1 m 1 m K m K m Laser L m Color sensor CL mm Color mark sensor BERO C mm /56 Siemens FS

57 Opto BEROs Summary of ranges Operational voltage Output Connection Features Form Page DC UC pnp npn Relays AS-Interface M 8 connector M1 connector Cable Terminals AS-Interface with FK block Timer function Anti-interference function Test input Molded plastic Metal enclosure V M1 / V M18 S / V M18 P / V K 31 / V K 1, K 1 R / V K 30 / V K 40 / V C 40 / V V K 80 / V L 50 / V Light arrays / V D 4, M5 / V M1 / V M18 S / V K 31 / V M18 P / V K 30 / V K 40 / V V K 80 / V L 18 / V CL 40 / V C 80 /93 Siemens FS /57

58 Opto BEROs Introduction Overview The Opto BERO photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected. Depending on the type of BERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. The following exist: Diffuse sensor or type D Retroreflective sensor or type R Thru-beam sensor or type T. The devices can be provided with background suppression as an option, or also as fiber-optic devices. The comprehensive range of Opto BERO operates using infrared, red or laser light and covers sensing ranges between 3 cm and 50 m. Due to the different physical principles of these systems, thru-beam sensors have wider sensing ranges than retroreflective sensors. Diffuse sensors can also react to diffuse-reflecting materials. Thus the sensing range is smaller than with retroreflective sensors. The Opto BEROs can be set quickly and easily by means of a Teach-In or potentiometer. A large selection of cubic, cylindrical and miniature designs will satisfy every wish. Design The devices can be mounted in any position. They should be installed in such a manner as to prevent dirt deposits as far as possible. The available accessories enable the devices to be mounted easily and correctly. Alignment Diffuse sensors The sensor must be aligned with the object to be sensed to ensure reliable switching. In devices that have a surplus light function, the relevant LED must be active. Retroreflective sensors Place the reflector at the required location and secure it firmly. Cover the reflector with adhesive tape so that only the center (approximately 5 % of the surface) remains free. Install the retroreflective sensor so that it switches reliably. Finally remove the adhesive tape from the reflector. Thru-beam sensors Place the receiver in the required position and secure it firmly. Align the emitter with the receiver as accurately as possible. Minimum clearance The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The following distances are recommended values only. The values given are for maximum sensitivity. NSD00795 Diffuse sensors a a Area of application The various versions of the Opto BEROs are preferably used in the following sectors: In conveyor systems In packaging machines In mechanical engineering In paper, textile and plastics processing In printing machines For access control. These photoelectric sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic. Special versions of the K 0 form in miniature enclosure and the C 40 are available for detecting transparent objects. Special devices such as the color sensor or color mark reader can be used to detect differences in color or contrast. The analog laser supports extremely precise distance measurements and position monitoring. Safety-related applications The use of the sensors is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the BERO. NSD00796 Retroreflective sensor with a NSD00797 NSD00801 /58 Siemens FS

59 Thru-beam sensor Opto BEROs Distance a D 4/M5 50 mm M1 50 mm M18 50 mm K mm K mm K mm K mm L 18 (laser retroreflective sensor) 150 mm 1 ) L 50 (laser diffuse sensor) 30 mm L 50 (laser retroreflective sensor) 80 mm 1) Focusing at 50 m. Setting the operating distance The sensitivity is adjusted with the built-in multi-turn potentiometer. Turning it clockwise increases the sensitivity. The potentiometer cannot be overwound (no stops). Diffuse sensors The sensitivity and the distance should be set such that the object is reliably detected; if required, the surplus light LED should be activated. The object must then be removed. If the output remains On, the sensitivity must be reduced slightly. Retroreflective sensors and thru-beam sensors The potentiometer is normally set to maximum sensitivity (clockwise rotation). This results in maximum surplus light. It may be necessary to reduce the sensitivity in the case of transparent objects. Cable length Long cables between the devices result in: Additional capacitive loading (short-circuit protection) Increased injection of interference. For this reason the specified maximum cable length must not be exceeded. Functions Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) The light from the emitter falls on an object and is reflected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the output is switched. The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiometer. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors. BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Introduction Diffuse sensor with background suppression Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All objects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is suppressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver. Retroreflective sensors The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed with a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range. An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch. Light array (7-beam retroreflective sensor) The light from all seven emitters of this special Opto BERO is directed to one reflector and reflected to the seven receivers of the BERO. The switching output switches as soon as one of the beams is interrupted. A line of 4 mm can be completely covered. Typical applications are found, e.g. in conveyor systems. Thru-beam sensors Thru-beam sensors comprise an emitter and a receiver. The emitter is aligned in such a way that the greatest possible amount of pulsed light from the emitter diode reaches the receiver. The receiver evaluates the incoming light to clearly separate it from the ambient light and other light sources. Any interruption of the light beam between emitter and receiver causes the output to switch. Siemens FS /59

60 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Introduction Devices for fiber-optic conductors The basic operation is the same for optical fibers made of glass or plastic. Optical fibers are fitted in front of the emitter and receiver. They represent the "extended eye" of the Opto BERO. As optical fibers are very small and flexible, they provide a practical solution to the problem of sensing at points that are not easily accessible. Furthermore no electrical potential is transferred. Color sensors The color sensor uses three LEDs with the colors red, green and blue. The light is emitted to the object. When the BERO is set, the color of the object is measured and assigned to an output state. During the learning phase, the BERO saves the detected color in a non-volatile EEPROM. This ensures that the setting procedure will not have to be repeated whenever the supply for the BERO is switched on. One color or a color range can be set. Color mark sensor BERO The color mark sensor uses green or red emitted light. The color is selected automatically depending on the contrast. The mark color and the background color can be set separately by means of two keys. Laser diffuse sensor with analog output The analog laser BERO can measure the exact distance of an object within its sensing range. Due to the use of visible laser light, the measurement is highly accurate and the output is extremely linear. All laser BEROs belong to safety class, i.e. they are harmless and can be used without any risk to health (e.g. to the eyes). This table lists data which are independent of the design. Type Solid-state output Relay output (K 80) Devices with laser (L 18, L 50) Voltage drop at 00 ma V Max..0 Max..4 Operating capacity ma Max Max. 00 Reverse current of outputs ma Max. 0.1 Max. 0.1 Power-up delay ms Max. 0 Max. 300 Max. 300 Differential travel (typical) 10% 10% 5% for diffuse sensors Repeat accuracy 5% of operating distance for diffuse sensors Ambient light limit Sunlight Lux 10,000 Halogen light Lux 3,000 Protective measures Overload protection Overvoltage protection Short-circuit protection Backup fuse required Max. cable length m Max. 50 Max. 50 Max. 100 For further technical specifications, see the respective form. Options Cable length The designs with cable are normally supplied with a cable of or 3 m in length (see Selection and ordering data ). Longer cables can be ordered as necessary. In this case, the Order No. must be supplemented by " Z" and the required length specified in plain text. /60 Siemens FS

61 Opto BEROs Introduction Circuit diagrams Fig. 1 Fig. M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable M8 connector, Type A, C, D Cable Fig. 3 Fig. 4 M 8 connector, Type B Cable M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Cable Fig. 5 Fig. 6 M1 connector, Type F, K, L Cable M1 connector, Type F, K, L Cable Fig. 7 Fig. 8 M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L Cable M1 connector, Type G, M Fig. 9 Fig. 10 M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, M Cable NSD00877 (1) AS-Interface AS-Interface, FK block (3) AS-Interface Fig. 11 Fig. 1 Screw terminals Screw terminals Fig. 13 Fig. 14 M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable Fig. 15 Fig. 16 NSD00880 BN (1) +U b V DC WH () BU (3) BK (4) Output dark-on 0 V Output light-on M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N NSD BN (1) WH () BU (3) 3 BK (4) +U b DC V Programming 0 V Switching output light-on/dark-on M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Fig. 17 Fig. 18 NSD00881a 4 1 BN (1) WH () BU (3) 3 BK (4) +U b V DC Changeover light-on/dark-on 0 V Switching output M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Fig. 19 Fig. 0 M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N BK = Black BU = Blue YE = Yellow BN = Brown GR = Gray WH = White Siemens FS /61

62 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Introduction Fig. 1 Fig. M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Fig. 3 Fig. 4 M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole NSD00880 BN (1) +U b V DC WH () BU (3) BK (4) Output dark-on 0 V Output light-on M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole Fig. 5 Fig. 6 M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Cable NSD00704 BN WH BK BU RD +U b V DC Switching output pnp 0 V Changeover light: U b Cable Fig. 9 Fig. 30 BN + U b V DC Cable WH Switching output npn BK BU 0 V RD Changeover light-on : U b NSD00885 Fig. 31 Fig. 3 BN + U b V DC Cable WH Switching output npn BK BU 0 V RD Changeover light: U b ; dark: 0 V Alarm output NSD00888 Fig. 33 Fig. 34 NSD00890 WH BN RD BK BU Switching output relay V AC/DC Cable NSD00887 NSD00891 BN WH BK BU RD BN WH BU OR + U b V DC Switching output pnp 0 V Changeover light: U b ; dark: 0 V Alarm output + U b V DC Switching output 0 V Programming Cable Cable Cable Fig. 35 Fig. 36 NSD0089 BN BK GR BU WH RD + U b V DC Switching output Time function 0 V Programming Alarm output Cable NSD00893 RD OR GR WH BN BU Control input A Control input B Analog output Switching output npn/pnp + U b V DC 0 V Cable Fig. 37 Fig. 38 Cable M1 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Cable Fig. 39 Fig. 40 M1 connector, Type G, M M1 connector, Type G, M BK = Black BU = Blue OR = Orange WH = White BN = Brown GR = Gray RD = Red YE = Yellow /6 Siemens FS

63 Opto BEROs Introduction Characteristics D 4 and M5 forms Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor M1 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor M18 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor Siemens FS /63

64 Opto BEROs Introduction K 30 and K 31 forms Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor K 40 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor K 80 form Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor /64 Siemens FS

65 Further information Opto BERO lexicon Terms associated with the technology of photoelectric proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC Connection to AS-Interface Assignment of data bits Data bits Meaning D0 Switching signal D1 Surplus light D D3 Test input 0 : emitter on 1 : emitter out Assignment of parameter bits Parameter bits Meaning P0 P1 Inversion of D0 0 : inverted 1 : not inverted P P3 Anti-interference function This function prevents mutual interference between Opto BEROs. The specified clearances between the devices does not have to be observed for devices with an anti-interference function. It is therefore possible to align, e. g. two retroreflective sensors with a common reflector. Function of the outputs Dark-ON The "Dark-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when no light reaches the receiver. Light-ON The "Light-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when light reaches the receiver. Antivalent The devices with antivalent output have outputs. One output is Dark-ON, and the other is Light-ON. Surplus light As an alternative, some devices can be supplied with a different configuration of outputs, one output Light-ON and the other for signaling the surplus light. Output current The devices are designed for a maximum output current (rated operating current, see Technical specifications ). If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload and short-circuit protection will be activated. Destruction of the device is effectively prevented. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have a similar effect to an overload. A minimum load current (smallest operating current) is not required. A built-in pull-up resistor ensures that an output signal is always available. Autocollimation With these devices, the optical axes of the emitter and receiver are identical. The device only has one optical axis. This means that there is no close range in front of the BERO and the accuracy of the switching point is higher. BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Introduction Spurious signal suppression The devices feature spurious signal suppression. It prevents the occurrence of spurious signals from the moment of application of the operating voltage until the moment when the device is ready for operation (approximately 5 ms). Sensing range The sensing range is the range within which the operating distance can be set. This term replaces any other previously used terms. Correction factors The specified sensing ranges of diffuse sensors are achieved with the specified surfaces by using matte-white standard paper. The following correction factors (approximate values) apply to other surfaces: Test card 100 % White paper 80 % Light-colored wood 73 % White plastic 70 % Cork 65 % Printed newspaper 60 % Gray PVC 57 % Black plastic % Black neoprene 0 % Automobile tires 15 % Sheet aluminum Raw 00 % Black anodized 150 % Matte (brushed) 10 % Stainless steel, polished 30 % Enabling input With Opto BEROs with a test input, the emitter can be switched on or off. Function monitoring can be implemented with appropriate evaluation of the output signal (light barrier: no obstruction of light beam / diffuse sensors: reflecting object exists). To disable the BERO, the enabling input must be connected to 0 V. For operation of the BERO, the enabling input does not have to be used. Ambient light limit Ambient light is the light produced by external light sources. The luminescence level is measured on the light incidence surface. Thanks to the use of modulated light, the devices are insensitive to ambient light. There is, however, an upper limit for the intensity of any external light which is referred to as the ambient light limit. It is specified for sunlight (unmodulated light) and halogen light (light modulated at twice the frequency of the electricity supply). Reliable operation is not possible above the respective ambient light limit. Siemens FS /65

66 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Introduction Surplus light The surplus light is the excess radiant power that falls on the light incidence surface and that is evaluated by the light receiver. The surplus light can decrease in the course of time due to pollution, changing of the reflection factor of the object and aging of the emitter diode, so that reliable operation is no longer guaranteed. Polarized light Natural light (including the light from the emitter diodes or laser diodes) is unpolarized. When the light has passed through a polarization filter, only that part of the light remains which oscillates in the polarization direction of the filter. Z X J All devices are therefore equipped with a surplus light LED. Devices are also available in which this signal is connected to one of the outputs. This can be used to recognize states that are not operationally safe any longer. Semiconductor lasers, laser diodes These are characterized by an extremely high-density beam and emit extremely tightly bundled light rays in visible red. The lasers used correspond to protection class! Differential travel The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The ranges are always specified with regard to the pick-up point on approach. IR light IR is the abbreviation for "infrared". It refers to electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength between 780 and 1500 nnm which is longer than that of visible light (wavelength between 380 and 780 nm). Fiber-optic conductors Fiber-optic conductors consist of plastic or glass fibers in which the light can also be directed around bends. Fiber-optic conductors support applications in which space is at a premium and under critical environmental conditions. Light-emitting diodes, LEDs In the Opto BEROs, LEDs are used as light beam sources. They have a narrow emission spectrum, can be easily modulated and have a long service life. In the Opto BEROs, they also serve to signal the switching status or the surplus light emission. Parallel connection Devices can be connected in parallel for logic gating of the outputs. Different logic operations can be achieved by mixed use of Dark-ON and Light-ON outputs. Attention: The power consumption increases. Leakage currents add up so that even in the off state, the load may be energized. Diodes in the output leads serve to decouple the pull-up resistors. They can be omitted when a small number of devices are connected NSD00801 in parallel. Retroreflective sensors use this polarized light to minimize the influence of unwanted reflections. With polarization filters in front of the emitter and receiver, the retroreflective sensor only reacts to light that is reflected by a special reflector, the so-called 3-way mirror. Other reflections do not cause a reaction. Modulated light Opto BEROs operate with modulated light, i.e. the emitter is only active for a short time. Depending on the type, the modulation frequency f mod of the modulated light is between 5 and 30 khz. f mod Y NSD00800 NSD00799 If an Opto BERO is operated in close proximity of another Opto BERO with the same modulation frequency, this may cause interference (see Minimum distance ). Operation with modulated light offers the following advantages: High degree of insensitivity to ambient light Larger sensing ranges Minimal temperature rise and therefore longer service life of the emitter diodes. /66 Siemens FS

67 Opto BEROs D 4 form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 5 (not adjustable) Standard target mm (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma 10 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e ma 100 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms.5.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Reliable detection Yellow LED Surplus light fallen below Yellow LED flashing Enclosure material D 4: stainless steel; M5: Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors (IR) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB mm npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 3-pole, type A npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 Thru-beam sensor (IR) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON npn, Light-ON 1 1 3RG70 4 0AB00 3RG70 4 0GB00 Emitter 3RG70 4 0BG00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 4 7AB00 3-pole, type A npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 4 7GB00 Emitter 3RG70 4 7BG00 3RG RG NSD0080 6,5 35 6,5 8 LED NSD00803 LED Siemens FS /67

68 M5 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 5 (not adjustable) Standard target mm (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma 10 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e ma 100 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms.5.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Reliable detection Yellow LED Surplus light fallen below Yellow LED flashing Enclosure material D 4: stainless steel; M5: Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors (IR) m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB mm npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 3-pole, type A npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 Thru-beam sensor (IR) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON npn, Light-ON 1 1 3RG70 3 0AB00 3RG70 3 0GB00 Emitter 3RG70 3 0BG00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 3 7AB00 3-pole, type A npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 3 7GB00 Emitter 3RG70 3 7BG00 3RG RG M 5x0,5 M 5x0,5 SW 7 SW 7 45 NSD , ,5 30 LED NSD00805 LED /68 Siemens FS

69 Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M1 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 1.5 m Supplied without reflector BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 4 m Enabling input for test purposes Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn M1 form Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma / 15 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG Siemens FS /69

70 60 50 SW 17 SW BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs M1 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Diffuse sensors 30 (adjustable by potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with (red, polarized) Order No. 660 (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG71 0 0AB00 3RG71 0 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 13 3RG71 0 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 14 3RG71 0 0GA00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG71 0 3AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG71 0 3AA00 npn, Light-ON 13 3RG71 0 3GB00 npn, Dark-ON 14 3RG71 0 3GA00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 14 3RG71 1 0AB mm pnp, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 1 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 14 3RG71 1 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 1 0GA00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 14 3RG71 1 3AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 1 3AA00 npn, Light-ON 14 3RG71 1 3GB00 npn, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 1 3GA00 Thru-beam sensor (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG71 0AB00 3RG71 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 14 3RG71 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 0GA00 Emitter 7 3RG71 0BG00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 14 3RG71 3AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 3AA00 npn, Light-ON 14 3RG71 3GB00 npn, Dark-ON 13 3RG71 3GA00 Emitter 7 3RG71 3BG00 3RG RG RG and 3RG M 1x1 3RG und 3RG M 1x1 LED LED /70 Siemens FS

71 Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M1 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 80 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 3 m Supplied without reflector BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp M18 S form Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 80 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma Rated operating current I e ma 150 Switching frequency Hz 700 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG RG , 3RG RG , 3RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Straight sensor Diffuse sensors 80 (adjustable by potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with (red, polarized) Order No. 660 (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG AB00 3RG AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG CD00 light function M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB mm pnp, Dark-ON 13 3RG AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG CD00 light function M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD00 Siemens FS /71

72 M18 S form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. Order No. No. cm nm Straight sensor Thru-beam sensor (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG76 4 0AB00 3RG76 4 0AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 4 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 4 0CD00 light function 0.34 mm Emitter 9 3RG76 4 0BG00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG76 4 3AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG76 4 3AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 4 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 4 3CD00 light function Emitter 9 3RG76 4 3BG00 Angled sensor Diffuse sensors 80 (adjustable by potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with (red, polarized) 660 (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG AB00 3RG AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG CD00 light function M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB mm pnp, Dark-ON 13 3RG AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG CD00 light function M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD00 Thru-beam sensor (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG76 5 0AB00 3RG76 5 0AA mm pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 0CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 5 0CD00 light function 0.34 mm Emitter 9 3RG76 5 0BG00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG76 5 3AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG76 5 3AA00 pnp, Light-ON and 5 3RG76 5 3CC00 Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON and surplus 6 3RG76 5 3CD00 light function Emitter 9 3RG76 5 3BG00 For dimension drawings, see M 18. /7 Siemens FS

73 Opto BEROs M18 form Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, Rated operating voltage 4 V DC connection using cable or M1 connector Electronics output pnp or npn Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable) Standard target mm (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma 5 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 500 Switching time ms 1 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Diffuse sensor with background suppression (adjustable by potentiometer) Order No. 660 (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 13 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 14 3RG GA00 M1 plug, pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG AB00 4-pole, type F pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 13 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 14 3RG GA00 M18 form M18 S form 3RG RG RG RG M 18 1 M ,6 NSD0_ ,6 NSD0_0188 Pot. LED GN YE M , SW 4 min. 34 7, Pot. LED GN YE M ,3 4 SW 4 min ,9 65 7,1 3 Siemens FS /73

74 M18 P form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cylindrical molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M1 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensing range 10 cm (not adjustable) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (not adjustable) Special design with straight or angular optic system Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 1.5 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensing range m (not adjustable) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 1 m (not adjustable) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Solid-state output pnp and npn, programmable as Light-ON or Dark-ON Exception with background suppression: Electronics output pnp or npn Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable) 10 (not adjustable) (not adjustable) Standard target mm (white) (white) (gray, 18 %) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 30 Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 1,5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG RG RG , 3RG Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor without polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 150 (adjustable) 00 (not adjustable) 100 (not adjustable) Reflector mm Reflector type S 48 Reflector type S 48 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 30 Rated operating current I e ma 150 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 1 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG RG RG /74 Siemens FS

75 Opto BEROs M18 P form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors 30 (adjustable by potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor with 880 (IR) m cable, PVC, pnp/npn, Light-ON or mm Dark-ON M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON (IR) m cable, PVC, mm pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON 150 (adjustable by potentiometer) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON 660 (red) m cable, PVC, mm pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON (IR) m cable, PVC, mm pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON 38 3RG76 0 1RH00 3RG76 0 3RH RG76 0 1RH60 3RG76 0 3RH RG76 1 1RH00 3RG76 1 3RH RG76 1 1RH51 3RG76 1 3RH51 Thru-beam sensor (IR) m cable, PVC, pnp/npn, Light-ON or 38 3RG76 1RH mm Dark-ON Emitter 1 3RG76 1BG00 M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON Emitter 3RG76 3RH00 3RG76 3BG00 Diffuse sensor with background suppression, straight optics (red) m cable, PVC, mm Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) pnp 15 3RG76 4 1CC00 npn 15 3RG76 4 1HC00 pnp 15 3RG76 4 3CC00 npn 15 3RG76 4 3HC00 Diffuse sensor with background suppression, angled optics (red) m cable, PVC, mm Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) pnp 15 3RG CC00 pnp 15 3RG CC00 npn 15 3RG HC00 Siemens FS /75

76 Opto BEROs M18 P form 3RG RG RG , 3RG , 3RG RG , 3RG , 3RG RG RG RG (angled optics) 3RG RG (straight optics) /76 Siemens FS

77 Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable through teach-in) Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects (adjustable with teach-in) Sensing range 50 cm BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Anti-interference function Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector K 0 form Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm (adjustable) 50 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (gray 18 %) Reflector type R 60 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 35 Rated operating current I e ma 100 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects (adjustable by "teach-in") 50 (adjustable by "teach-in") Order No. 660 (red) m cable, PUR, mm Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp npn RG CH00 3RG HH00 M8 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 16 3RG CH00 4-pole, type B npn 16 3RG HH (red) m cable, PUR, mm Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp npn RG CH5 3RG HH5 M8 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 16 3RG CH5 4-pole, type B npn 16 3RG HH5 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 0 3RX RG RG Siemens FS /77

78 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs K 1, K 1 R forms Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP68, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range 60 cm Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 3 m Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range cm Standard target/reflector mm (white 90 %) Reflector type R 60 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma Rated operating current I e ma 150 Switching frequency Hz 700 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Operational voltage Red LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP) Degree of protection IP68 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG RG K 1 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG GA00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG AB00 3-pole, type A pnp, Dark-ON 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG GA00 Retroreflective (red) m cable, PUR, sensor with mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG GA00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG AB00 3-pole, type A pnp, Dark-ON 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG GA00 K 1 thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request. /78 Siemens FS

79 "!!!! BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs K 1, K 1 R forms K 1 R form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG74 0 0AB00 3RG74 0 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG74 0 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG74 0 0GA00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG74 0 7AB00 3-pole, type A pnp, Dark-ON 3RG74 0 7AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG74 0 7GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG74 0 7GA00 Retroreflective (red) m cable, PUR, sensor with mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 3RG74 1 0AB00 3RG74 1 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG74 1 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG74 1 0GA00 M8 plug, pnp, Light-ON 3RG74 1 7AB00 3-pole, type A pnp, Dark-ON 3RG74 1 7AA00 npn, Light-ON 3RG74 1 7GB00 npn, Dark-ON 3RG74 1 7GA00 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 1 3RX7 308 K 1 R thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request. 3RG RG , ' 5, '!!! "!! "!! ' $!! $ & $ 3RG RG , '! ' ' 5, ' " ' ' " $ " "!! &! ' # "!!! & $ & & $ Siemens FS /79

80 K 31 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 60 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material Technical specification Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Sensing range cm 60 (adjustable) (adjustable) 00 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) (white) Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG RG Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiber Standard target mm (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma 15 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG /80 Siemens FS

81 Opto BEROs K 31 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors 60 (adjustable by potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with (adjustable by potentiometer) 00 (adjustable by potentiometer) Thru-beam sensor 600 (adjustable by potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Depends on FO conductor 880 (IR) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 1 1 3RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type A pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 1 1 3RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA (red, polarized) M8 plug, 3-pole, type A pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA00 m cable, PUR, pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB mm pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type A pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA (IR) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 1 1 3RG70 1 0AB00 3RG70 1 0AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 1 0GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 1 0GA00 Emitter 3RG70 1 0BG00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type A pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 1 7AB00 pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 1 7AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 1 7GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 1 7GA00 Emitter 3RG70 1 7BG (red) m cable, PUR, mm pnp, Light-ON pnp, Dark-ON 1 1 3RG AB00 3RG AA00 npn, Light-ON 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA00 M8 plug, 3-pole, type A pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG AB00 pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG AA00 npn, light-on 1 3RG GB00 npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG GA00 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 30, K 31 3RX RG , 3RG , 3RG RG RG RG , 3RG , 3RG RG RG Siemens FS /81

82 K 30 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 1. m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 4 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 1 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Sensing range cm 10 (adjustable) 400 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range cm 100 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiber Standard target mm (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma 15 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG RG /8 Siemens FS

83 Opto BEROs K 30 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. Order No. diag. No. cm nm Diffuse sensors (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, pnp 3 3RG CC00 Light-ON, Dark-ON (adjustable by mm (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 potentiometer) Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG CC00 4-pole, type B (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 Retroreflective (red, 3 m cable, PUR, pnp 3 3RG CC00 Light-ON, Dark-ON sensor with (adjustable by polarized) mm (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 potentiometer) Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG CC00 4-pole, type B (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 Thru-beam sensor (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, pnp 3 3RG70 1 0CC00 Light-ON, Dark-ON (adjustable by mm (compatible) npn 3 3RG70 1 0HC00 potentiometer) Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG70 1 0CD00 light function npn 4 3RG70 1 0HD mm Emitter 3RG70 1 0BE00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG70 1 7CC00 4-pole, type B (compatible) npn 3 3RG70 1 7HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG70 1 7CD00 light function npn 4 3RG70 1 7HD00 Emitter 3RG70 1 7BE00 Sensor for plastic Depends on 660 (red) 3 m cable, PUR, pnp 3 3RG CC00 optical fibers FO conductor mm Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 M8 plug, Light-ON, Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG CC00 4-pole, type B (compatible) npn 3 3RG HC00 Light-ON and surplus pnp 4 3RG CD00 light function npn 4 3RG HD00 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 30, K31 3RX RG , 3RG RG RG RG , 3RG RG RG Siemens FS /83

84 K 40 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 or M1 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 15 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Solid-state output pnp Solid-state output npn on request Supplied with fixing accessories Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range cm 00 (adjustable) 600 (adjustable) 1500 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 0 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0 (typ.) ma / 15 (emitter / receiver) Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.1 Type 3RG RG RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Diffuse sensors 00 (adjustable by potentiometer) 880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, Light-ON, Dark-ON mm (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Order No. pnp 3 3RG70 0 0CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 0 0CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 0 7CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 0 7CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 0 3CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 0 3CD00 /84 Siemens FS

85 Opto BEROs K 40 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. cm nm Retroreflective sensor with 600 (adjustable by potentiometer) Thru-beam sensor 1500 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, Light-ON, Dark-ON mm (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Order No. pnp 3 3RG70 1 0CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 1 0CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 1 7CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 1 7CD00 pnp 3 3RG70 1 3CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 1 3CD (red) 3 m cable, PUR, pnp 3 3RG70 0CC mm Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function pnp 4 3RG70 0CD mm Emitter 3RG70 0BE00 M8 plug, 4-pole, type B M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Emitter Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Emitter pnp 3 3RG70 7CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 7CD00 3RG70 7BE00 pnp 3 3RG70 3CC00 pnp 4 3RG70 3CD00 3RG70 3BE00 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 40 3RX RG RG RG RG RG , 3RG Siemens FS /85

86 C 40 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M1 connector Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor Sensing range 70 cm (adjustable by teach-in) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable by teach-in) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 6 m (adjustable by teach-in) Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range 1 m (adjustable by teach-in) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied with mounting material and without reflector Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm 70 (adjustable) (adjustable) Standard target mm (white) (gray) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 35 5 Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 0.5,5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.1 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) 100 (adjustable) Reflector mm Reflector type D 84 Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I ma 35 max. Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 1000 Switching time ms 0.5 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.1 Type 3RG RG /86 Siemens FS

87 Opto BEROs C 40 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Diffuse sensors 70 (adjustable by "teach-in") Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects (adjustable by "teach-in") 600 (adjustable by "teach-in") 100 (adjustable by "teach-in") 660 (red) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F 660 (red) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red, polarized) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON 39 3RG7 40 3CH RG7 40 3HH RG7 44 3CH RG7 44 3HH RG7 41 3CH RG7 41 3HH RG7 41 3CH5 40 3RG7 41 3HH5 3RG Siemens FS /87

88 K 80 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M1 connector or Pg 11 cable gland Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor) Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC or 40 V AC/DC Inputs and outputs Electronics output pnp or npn - Programmable as Light-ON or Dark-ON - Light-ON, Dark-ONDark-ON (compatible) Relay output V AC/DC Timing function (delayed pick-up or drop-out, pulse shaping) Enabling input for test purposes Supplied without mounting material Versions with AS-Interface I/O configuration 1, ID code 1 Assembly on FK coupling module Current consumption from AS-Interface max. 30 ma Switching time max. 5 s Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range m (adjustable) 0,... 1 (adjustable) Standard target mm (white) (white) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma Operating voltage range (AC/DC) V No-load power, max. VA Rated operating current I e ma (at AC 40 V) 00 Switching frequency, max. Hz Switching time, max. ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG RG7 10 6MC00 3RG , 3RG Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor Sensing range m 6 (adjustable) 50 (adjustable) Reflector mm Reflector type D 84 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma Operating voltage range (AC/DC) V No-load power, max. VA Rated operating current I e ma (at AC 40 V) (at AC 40 V) Switching frequency, max. Hz Switching time, max. ms Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3 Type 3RG , 3RG RG7 11 6MC00 3RG , 3RG RG7 1 6MC00, 3RG7 0 6FG00 /88 Siemens FS

89 Opto BEROs K 80 form Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. m nm Diffuse sensors (adjustable by potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with background suppression Retroreflective sensor with 0,... 1 (adjustable by potentiometer) 6 (adjustable by potentiometer) 880 (IR) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON 5-pole, type G, and surplus light, with enabling input with timing function ( s) Pg 11 Pg 11, with enabling input Pg 11 FK coupling module 880 (IR) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F 660 (red, polarized) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) AS-Interface, with timing function ( s) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON 5-pole, type G, and surplus light, with enabling input with timing function ( s) Pg 11 Pg 11, with enabling input FK coupling module M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) AS-Interface, with timing function ( s) Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON 5-pole, type G, and surplus light, with enabling input with timing function ( s) Pg 11 Pg 11, with enabling input Pg 11 FK coupling module Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) AS-Interface, with timing function ( s) Order No. pnp 5 3RG7 00 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 00 3HC00 pnp 8 3RG7 10 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 10 3EK00 pnp 1 3RG7 00 6CC00 npn 1 3RG7 00 6HC00 pnp 1 3RG7 10 6DK00 npn 1 3RG7 10 6EK RG7 10 6MC RG7 10 5WS00 pnp 5 3RG7 04 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 04 3HC00 pnp 8 3RG7 14 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 14 3EK00 pnp 1 3RG7 04 6CC00 npn 1 3RG7 04 6HC00 pnp 1 3RG7 14 6DK00 npn 1 3RG7 14 6EK RG7 14 5WS00 pnp 5 3RG7 01 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 01 3HC00 pnp 8 3RG7 11 3DK00 npn 8 3RG7 11 3EK00 pnp 1 3RG7 01 6CC00 npn 1 3RG7 01 6HC00 pnp 1 3RG7 11 6DK00 npn 1 3RG7 11 6EK RG7 11 6MC RG7 11 5WS00 Siemens FS /89

90 K 80 form BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. m nm Thru-beam sensor 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 880 (IR) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Pg 11 FK coupling module Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function ( s) Emitter with enabling input AS-Interface, with timing function ( s) Order No. pnp 5 3RG7 0 3CC00 npn 5 3RG7 0 3HC00 pnp 6 3RG7 1 3DK00 7 3RG7 0 3BG00 pnp 1 3RG7 0 6CC00 npn 1 3RG7 0 6HC00 pnp 1 3RG7 1 6DK00 npn 1 3RG7 1 6EK00 1 3RG7 0 6BG RG7 1 6MC00 1 3RG7 0 6FG RG7 1 5WS00 Emitter 10 3RG7 0 5WG00 Accessories Mounting bracket for K 80 3RX RG RG /90 Siemens FS

91 Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Programmable using teach-in Electronics output pnp or npn Supplied without mounting material KL 40 form Operating mode Sensor for plastic optical fibers Sensing range mm Max. 80 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 55 Rated operating current I e ma 100 Switching frequency Hz 1500 Switching time ms 0.33 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Set Green/red LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG Operating mode Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. nm For plastic fiberoptic conductor Order No. 660 (red) m cable, PVC, mm Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp npn RG CH00 3RG HH00 M8 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 3 3RG CH00 4-pole, type B npn 3 3RG HH00 Accessories Mounting bracket for KL 40 3RX RG $ " " " #! $ $! 5, & " ' = % $ # % # " $ # -, ; - -, / 4, H C H= E C Siemens FS /91

92 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs CL 40 form color sensors Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Color sensor with plastic optical fibers Sensing range mm Rated operating voltage DC 4 V Programmable using teach-in Sensors with cable connection, also with remote Teach-in and alarm output Electronics output pnp or npn Timer function Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Color sensor with plastic optical fibers Sensing range mm Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 60 Rated operating current I e ma 100 Switching frequency Hz 550 Switching time ms 0.1 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red), 55 (green), 470 (blue) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Programming Green/red LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG Operating mode Sensing range Connection Switching output Circ. diag. Order No. No. mm Color sensor with m cable, PVC, pnp 35 3RG CA00 Solid-state + alarm plastic optical mm output npn 35 3RG HA00 fibers M8 plug, Solid-state pnp 5 3RG CA00 4-pole, type B npn 5 3RG HA00 Accessories Mounting bracket for CL 40 3RX RG $ "! $ ' & & & $! " " # 5, & # = # % # " $ # -, / -, ; - -, 4, / H C H= E C /9 Siemens FS

93 ' " Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M8 connector Color sensor with plastic optical fibers Sensing range 9 or 18 mm Rated operating voltage DC 4 V BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Programmable using teach-in Electronics output pnp Timer function Supplied without mounting material C 80 form color mark sensors Operating mode Color mark sensor Sensing range mm 9 or 18 mm Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 80 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Analog output (R i = kω) V Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 0.05 Wavelength (type of light) nm 630 (red) or 56 (green); automatic selection Displays Switching status Yellow LED Ready Green LED Enclosure material Die-cast aluminum Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG CH5. Operating mode Sensing range Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. m Color mark sensor BERO Order No. 9 M1 plug, Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG CH55 4-pole, type F 18 Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 6 3RG CH54 3RG CH5. # ' % # &! # # & & # #!! % " % # &! $ $ & # ' 4 - ), ; 7 6 # & " N ) 4 * / 4! ' & "! 5, & # = Siemens FS /93

94 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs L 18 form laser Overview Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP65, connection using cable or M1 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 3 according to IEC 6085 Thru-beam sensor Sensing range 50 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp Supplied with focusing and adjustment aid, without fixing materials Operating mode Laser thru-beam sensor Sensing range m 50 (adjustable) Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 15 (receiver), 10 (emitter) Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 6000 Switching time ms < Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red laser light, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Red LED Operational voltage Green LED Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K 0.1 Type 3RG , 3RG Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. m nm Straight sensor Laser thru-beam sensor Angled sensor Laser thru-beam sensor 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 50 (adjustable by potentiometer) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red, polarized) 3 m cable, PUR, 5 3RG CC mm pnp, Light-ON, Dark- ON (compatible) pnp, Light-ON and 6 3RG CD00 surplus light function Emitter 9 3RG BE00 M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, Light-ON, Dark- 5 3RG CC00 ON (compatible) pnp, Light-ON and 6 3RG CD00 surplus light function Emitter 9 3RG BE00 3 m cable, PUR, 5 3RG CC mm pnp, Light-ON, Dark- ON (compatible) pnp, Light-ON and 6 3RG CD00 surplus light function Emitter 9 3RG BE00 M1 plug, 4-pole, type F pnp, Light-ON, Dark- 5 3RG CC00 ON (compatible) pnp, Light-ON and 6 3RG CD00 surplus light function Emitter 9 3RG BE00 /94 Siemens FS

95 Opto BEROs L 18 form laser Straight sensor 3RG C.00 3RG BE00 3RG C.00 3RG BE00 Angled sensor 3RG C.00 3RG BE00 3RG C.00 3RG BE00 Siemens FS /95

96 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs L 50 form laser Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M1 connector Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 3 according to IEC 6085 Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Retroreflective sensor with Sensing range 1 m (adjustable using potentiometer) Supplied without reflector Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Electronics output pnp Analog output Supplied without mounting material Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor Sensing range cm (adjustable) 100 (adjustable) Standard target/reflector mm (white) Reflector type RL 50 Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 10 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 50 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 500 Switching time ms < 0. Wavelength (type of light) nm 670 (red laser light) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Surplus light Red LED Operational voltage Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature drift %/K 0.1 Type 3RG RG Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output Sensing range mm (adjustable) Resolution µm 80 0 Linearity ms < 1 % of measuring range (40 mm) Measuring spot diameter mm < 0.8 (at distance of 65 mm) Operating voltage range (DC) V (max. 10 % residual ripple) No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 35 Analog output V Output current, max. ma 3 Switching frequency Hz Switching time ms 1 10 Wavelength (type of light) nm Displays Surplus light Red LED Operational voltage Green LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS) Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient µm/k 18 Type 3RG70 56.CM00 3RG70 56.CM03 /96 Siemens FS

97 Opto BEROs L 50 form laser Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor Sensing range/resolution cm (adjustable using potentiometer) 1.00 cm (adjustable using potentiometer) Light type Connection Switching output/ analog output nm 670 (red laser light) 670 (red laser light) m cable, PUR, Light-ON, Dark-ON mm (compatible) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function m cable, PUR, mm Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) M1 plug, 4-pole, type F Light-ON and surplus light function Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible) Light-ON and surplus light function Circ. diag. No. Order No. pnp 5 3RG CC00 npn 5 3RG HC00 pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 pnp 5 3RG CC00 npn 5 3RG HC00 pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 pnp 5 3RG CC00 npn 5 3RG HC00 pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 pnp 5 3RG CC00 npn 5 3RG HC00 pnp 6 3RG CD00 npn 6 3RG HD00 Laser diffuse sensor 80 µm 6 m cable, PVC, Analog V, 37 3RG CM00 0 µm mm, rising signal with analog output shielded 37 3RG CM03 80 µm M1 plug, Analog V, 37 3RG CM00 0 µm 4-pole, type F rising signal 37 3RG CM03 Accessories Mounting bracket for L 50 3RX7 30 Cable with connector, shielded, mm 3RX1 680 Cable with right-angle connector, shielded, mm 3RX RG , 3RG RG Characteristics 3RG70 56.CM0. Siemens FS /97

98 BERO Proximity Switches Opto BEROs Light arrays Overview Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP54, connection using cable or M8 connector 7-beam retroreflective sensor Sensing range 1.4 m Rated operating voltage 4 V DC Autocollimation principle Solid-state output pnp, switches on interruption in at least one light beam Supplied with fixing accessories, without reflector Operating mode Light arrays Sensing range cm 140 Reflector mm Reflector type R 45 Operating voltage range (DC) V No-load supply current I 0, max. ma 30 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency Hz 50 Switching time ms 10 Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) Displays Switching status Yellow LED Contamination monitoring Red LED Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin) Degree of protection IP54 Ambient temperature C Temperature coefficient %/K Type 3RG CD7 Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No. cm nm Light arrays (red, polarized) M8 plug, 4-pole, type B Dark-ON and surplus light function 6 3RG CD7 3RG CD7 /98 Siemens FS

99 Overview The plastic fiber-optic conductors are used in conjunction with the Opto BEROs of K 30, K 31 and KL 40 forms. The sensing range of the plastic fiber-optic conductors depends on the type of Opto BERO used. The main advantages are: 7 Extremely small dimensions 7 Small bending radii 7 For cutting to length 7 Visible light 7 Wide range of types 7 Attractively priced. BERO Proximity Switches Accessories for Opto BEROs Plastic optical fibers Typical beam diagram (type 3RX7 003) Attenuation at 660 nm, max. db/m 0,4 Angle of incidence, max. ± 56 Standard length m ± 01 Bending radius, min. mm 5 Tensile load, max. N 30 Sleeve material Polyethylene Degree of protection Sensor head IP67 Sensor IP65 Temperature range C Solvent resistance Not resistant Version Sensing range for Opto BERO Order No. Plastic fiber-optic conductors for diffuse sensors individual fibers Ø 1 mm, can be cut Adapter sleeves for Ø. mm contained in the scope of supply. 0 mm 40 mm 35 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form 3RX7 001 individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut 3RX mm 10 mm 110 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form individual fibers Ø 1 mm, can be cut Adapter sleeves for Ø. mm contained in the scope of supply 0 mm 40 mm 35 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form 3RX7 004 individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut 3RX mm 10 mm 100 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form Siemens FS /99

100 Accessories for Opto BEROs Plastic optical fibers Version Sensing range for Opto BERO Order No. Plastic fiber-optic conductors for thru-beam sensors individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut (fine internal fibers) 60 mm 10 mm 90 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form 3RX7 006 individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut 3RX mm 400 mm 80 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut (fine internal fibers) 60 mm 10 mm 60 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form 3RX7 008 individual fibers Ø. mm, can be cut 3RX mm 400 mm 80 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form Front lenses Cutting tool for fiber-optic conductor Front lenses (1 pair) for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type 1,500 mm 3,000 mm,000 mm Front lenses 90 (1 pair) for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type 50 mm 500 mm 350 mm K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form K 31 form K 30 form KL 40 form 3RX RX7 90 Cutting tool for plastic fiber-optic conductors 3RX7 918 /100 Siemens FS

101 Accessories for Opto BEROs Mounting brackets Version Order No. Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs with cylindrical M 18 enclosure Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 301 Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 0, K 1 forms 3RX7 308 Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 30, K 31 forms Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 910 Mounting bracket for 35 mm rail for Opto BEROs of K 30, K 31 forms Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 304 Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of KL 40, CL 40 forms 3RX7 313 Siemens FS /101

102 Accessories for Opto BEROs Mounting brackets Version Order No. Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 40, form (included in scope of supply) Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 911 Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 80 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 303 Mounting bracket, adjustable, for Opto BEROs with cylindrical enclosure M 18, particularly for laser BEROs of L 18 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 300 Mounting bracket for laser BEROs of L 50 form Material: Galvanized steel 3RX7 30 /10 Siemens FS

103 Accessories for Opto BEROs Reflectors Version Standard for form Order No. D mm diameter Range typically 40 %, referred to type D 84 D mm diameter Range typically 60 %, referred to type D 84 D mm diameter M1, M18, K 30, K 31, K 40, C 40, K80 3RX RX RX7 916 S mm diameter Range typically 50 %, referred to type D 84 M18 P, K 50 3RX7 9 1A R 70 Range typically 30 %, referred to type D 84 3RX7 90 1A R 45 Reflector 45 mm 58 mm Range typically 60 %, referred to type D 84 Light arrays 3RX7 94 R 60 Reflector 40 mm 60 mm Range typically 40 to 50 %, referred to Type D 84 R 84 Reflector 84 mm 84 mm high reflection factor for wide ranges K 0, K 1 3RX RX7 306 RL 50 Reflector for laser light, 50 mm x 50 mm L 50 3RX7 307 Reflecting foil 100 mm 100 mm, range %, referred to type D 84 B 3RX7 917 Siemens FS /103

104 Inductive BEROs Summary of ranges Overview Operating distance Cylindrical forms 3 mm diameter 4 mm diameter M mm diameter 6.5 mm diameter M8 M8 8 mm diameter M1 M1 1 mm diameter 1 mm diameter M18 M18 18 mm diameter 18 mm diameter 0 mm diameter M30 M30 Shielded/unshielded b b b b nb b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb b nb Standard duty 0.6 mm /1 0.8 mm /13 /13 1 mm / mm /16 /17 /18 /17 mm /130,5 mm /136 /136 4 mm /144 5 mm /151 /15 8 mm / mm /165 /164 / mm /171 0 mm 5 mm 30 mm 40 mm Standard duty (PLC) 1 mm /15 mm /131,5 mm 4 mm /146 5 mm /153 8 mm / mm / mm /173 0 mm Extra duty ( 65 V DC or AC/DC) 1 mm /15 mm /131,5 mm 4 mm /146 5 mm /153 8 mm / mm /165 / mm /173 0 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm With analog output mm /157 /104 Siemens FS

105 Inductive BEROs Summary of ranges Cubic designs Operating distance 30 mm diameter 30 mm diameter 34 mm diameter 5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 8 mm Box with M 14 Box with M 14 1 mm 3 mm 1 mm 40 mm 1 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 60 mm 80 mm 60 mm 80 mm 80 mm 100 mm 80 mm 100 mm 100 mm 100 mm b nb nb b b b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb Shielded/unshielded Standard duty 0.6 mm / mm 1 mm / mm /134 /134 mm /135,5 mm /145 4 mm /15 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm /17 15 mm /180 /181 0 mm /187 5 mm / mm / mm Standard duty (PLC) 1 mm mm /138,5 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm / mm /18 0 mm Extra duty (65 V DC or AC/DC) 1 mm mm /138,5 mm 4 mm /15 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm / mm /175 /180 /184 /18 0 mm / mm / mm /194 / mm Siemens FS /105

106 Inductive BEROs Summary of ranges Operating distance Cylindrical forms 3 mm diameter 4 mm diameter M mm diameter 6.5 mm diameter M8 M8 8 mm diameter M1 M1 1 mm diameter 1 mm diameter M18 M18 18 mm diameter 18 mm diameter 0 mm diameter M30 M30 Shielded/unshielded b b b b nb b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb b nb Extreme ambient conditions (IP68) 0.6 mm /1 /1 1 mm mm /13 /13.5 mm /139 /139 4 mm /147 /148 /147 5 mm /154 /154 8 mm /160 /161 / mm / mm /176 Greater rated operating distance mm /133.5 mm /139 /139 3 mm /140 /140 4 mm /149 6 mm /156 /156 8 mm /16 10 mm /169 1 mm / mm /175 0 mm /180 mm /186 5 mm 30 mm 35 mm 40 mm / mm 65 mm U BERO without reduction factor 1.5 mm /19 3 mm /14 4 mm /150 5 mm /155 8 mm / mm /168 1 mm / mm 0 mm /185 5 mm 35 mm 40 mm 75 mm Pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (IP68) 3 mm /143 /106 Siemens FS

107 Inductive BEROs Summary of ranges Cubic forms Operating distance 30 mm diameter 30 mm diameter 34 mm diameter 5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 8 mm Box with M 14 Box with M 14 1 mm 3 mm 1 mm 40 mm 1 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm 60 mm 80 mm 60 mm 80 mm 80 mm 100 mm 80 mm 100 mm 100 mm 100 mm b nb nb b b b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb Shielded/unshielded Extreme ambient conditions (IP68 / IP69 K) 0.6 mm 1 mm mm.5 mm / mm /176 / mm Greater rated operating distance mm.5 mm /141 3 mm 4 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm 15 mm /183 0 mm /184 mm /187 5 mm / mm / mm / mm /197 / mm / mm U BEROs without reduction factor 1.5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm / mm 0 mm /188 5 mm /19 35 mm /19 40 mm / mm 4 mm 5 mm 8 mm Siemens FS /107

108 Inductive BEROs Introduction Overview Application examples Recognition of broken drills The inductive BEROs are position switches that can be operated without contact, that contain no mechanical parts subject to wear, and that are to a large extent insensitive to environmental conditions. They are used in applications with stringent requirements for reliability, switch point accuracy, service life, number of switching operations, operating speed, and so on. Area of application Inductive BEROs are the low-cost method for non-contact detection of metal objects. They are used in sectors in which metal components play an important role, e.g. 7 In the motor industry 7 In mechanical engineering 7 In the robotics industry 7 In conveyor systems and 7 In the paper and printing industry The induction principle and the experience gained by Siemens over many years have made the inductive BEROs what they are: extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long service life thanks to a lack of wearing parts as well as their insensitivity to temperature, noise, light and water. Our customers also benefit from the wide range of inductive BERO proximity switches that Siemens offers. Our complete range meets a wide range of different requirements and leaves no wishes unfulfilled. Inductive BEROs are available 7 With operating distances from 0.6 to 75 mm 7 In cylindrical and cubic designs 7 In the standard version as 3- and 4-wire sensors 7 As -wire sensors for solid-state inputs 7 For extra duty ( 65 V DC or 30 V AC/DC) 7 To the IP68 degree of protection for extreme environmental conditions 7 With increased operating distances 7 Without a reduction factor 7 As pressure-resistant sensors 7 According to DESINA specification 7 For direct connection to AS-Interface and 7 As intrinsically safe sensors for potentially explosive environments. The inductive BERO proximity switches are classified in accordance with their applications or their technical characteristics: Recognition of positioning screws on the wheel for velocity or direction control Recognition of the valve position (completely open or closed) Recognition of broken pieces on a mill Recognition of cans and lids BEROs for standard duty Rated operating voltage: 15 to 34 V DC (with 3RG46: 10 to 30 V DC) /108 Siemens FS

109 Inductive BEROs Output - 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, up to 00 ma - 4-wire BERO: 1 NO and 1 NC (antivalent), pnp up to 00 ma Operating distance acc. to standard The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance. BEROs for PLCs (-wire) Rated operating voltage: 15 to 34 V DC Output -wire BERO: 1 NO, up to 5 ma Residual current and voltage drop to suit solid-state inputs Operating distance acc. to standard The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance. Advantages: 7 Minimum wiring overheads 7 Direct replacement of mechanical position switches possible in installations that are not safety-oriented 7 Power is supplied from the solid-state input 7 npn as well as pnp switching. BEROs for extra duty Rated operating voltage: - 3-wire BERO: 10 to 65 V DC - -wire BERO: 0 to 30 V AC/DC Output - 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp, up to 300 ma - -wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, resistive load up to 300 ma The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance. Advantages: 7 Problem-free adaptation to different rated operating voltages 7 Insensitive to voltage deviations BEROs for extreme environmental conditions (IP69 K) Rated operating voltage: - -wire BERO: AC/DC 0 to 30 V - 3-wire BERO: 15 to 34 V DC, 10 to 65 V DC, - 4-wire BERO: DC 15 to 34 V Output - 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp up to 300 ma - 4-wire BERO: NO and 1NC (antivalent),pnp up to 00mA The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance. Advantage 7 Can be used under extreme environmental conditions according to IP68 by use of a well-sealed enclosure with a special casting compound. Introduction BEROs with greater operating distance Rated operating voltage: DC 10 to 65 V (with 3RG46: 10 to 30 V DC) Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp up to 300 ma Operating distance far above the standard, up to three times the rated operating distance defined in the standard The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance. Advantages: 7 Wide range of mounting adjustment 7 A smaller type can be selected for the required operating distance 7 Reduction of actuation distance is corrected for non-ferrous metals U BEROs without reduction factor Rated operating voltage: 3-wire BERO: 10 to 30 V DC Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO, pnp up to 00 ma Advantages: 7 No reduction factor for non-ferrous metals 7 Resistant to magnetic fields, i.e. these BEROs are resistant to welding. Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. = 1 ka at 5.4 mm; except 3RG46 48: 140 mt r.m.s. except 3RG46 44: 140 mt r.m.s. except 3RG46 43: 75 mt r.m.s. BEROs pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (750 psi) Rated operating voltage: 10 to 30 V DC Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO, pnp up to 00mA Operating distance: 3 mm. Advantages: 7 Suitable for extreme dynamic mechanical stress 7 Easy to install: BERO can be screw fastened against a stop, no adjustment required 7 Sensing face seal is gas-tight BEROs with analog output Rated operating voltage: 10 to 30 V DC Output - Voltage output 0 to 5 V DC - Current output 1 to 5mA, Short-circuit protection, inductive interference protection, total reverse polarity protection Non-linearized design Connection through cable or S1 connector Approvals 3RG40, 3RG41 devices with M 1 or M 18 connectors as well as terminal compartments are UL and CSA listed. For a complete overview, see under Appendix. Explosion protection Approvals for Ex zones and/or according to ATEX on request. Personal safety The use of the inductive BEROs is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the BERO. NSD00801 Siemens FS /109

110 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Design Specifications IEC , EN (VDE 0660, Part 08) Minimum clearance The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. Therefore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sensors. The distance a depends on the sensor size and type (see the diagrams in selection tables). NSD00796 a Degree of protection Degree of protection according to IEC Degree of protection IP67 Where: 6 Protection against the entry of dust. Complete contact protection (electric). 7 Protection against water when the enclosure is immersed in water under given pressure and time conditions. Entry of water in harmful amounts is not allowed. Test conditions: Immersion depth 1 m Time 30 min Degree of protection IP68 Where: 6 As above. 8 Protection against water when submersed. The leak test is based on IEC , test ql. Contrary to the standard, the tested device is stored in steam and not in water since greater stress exists with this type of storage. Parameters: 7.4 Initial conditions: operating distance at T amb = 5 C ± 5 C Test liquid: tap water 7.5. Temperature of test liquid: 105 C 5 C, Test pressure: 1 N/cm (1. bar) Stress duration: 5 days 7.6 Post-treatment: drying at room temperature and cooling. The final measurement is made as soon as the device under test has reached room temperature. 7.7 Final measurement: operating distance at T amb = 5 C ± 5 C. The permissible change is ± 10% of the initial state. Degree of protection IP69 K Where: 6 As above. 9 K Protection against water with high-pressure jet cleaning. (i.e.: water directed at extremely high pressure onto the enclosure from all directions must not result in harmful effects.) Connectors For the cylindrical types, 8 mm combined plugs or plugs with M1 threads are offered as standard (3-pole or 4-pole). A cable plug is additionally required for the plug-and-socket connections, see under Accessories. As an option, plugs with an M18 thread (3-pole) are also offered for the M18 and M30 types. Cables In general, highly flexible cables with oil-resistant outer sheaths of polyurethane (PUR) are used that are m long as standard. For applications where cables come into contact with acids or alkalis, please order devices with PVC cables. For devices used in applications to UL and CSA, PVC cables must be ordered. See Options for other cable lengths and materials. Cable length For the BERO proximity switches, long cables cause: Capacitive loading of the output Increased injection of interference. Cables should be shorter than 300 m even under favorable conditions. Cable routing The connecting leads of the proximity switches should not be routed in a cable channel alongside cables that are used to switch inductive loads (e.g. contactor coils, solenoid valves, motors) or that carry the current for solid-state motor drives. The cable lengths should be kept as short as possible; with favorable routing (small coupling capacitance, small interference voltages), the length may be up to 300 m. Interference can be reduced by means of the following measures: Clearance from interfering cables > 100 mm, Shielding Connection of coils (of contactors, relays or solenoid valves) with RC elements or varistors. /110 Siemens FS

111 Functions A high-frequency alternating field is generated in the BERO and emerges at the "sensing face". The physical size of this alternating field determines the "range" of the device. When a material that is a good conductor of electricity and/or magnetism comes into close proximity with the sensing surface, the field is damped. Both states (field damped or undamped) are evaluated in the BERO and result in a change in the output state of the switch. Built-in protection The protective circuits built into most BEROs (see Selection and ordering data ) make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage. Protection is possible against 7 Spurious signals 7 Short-circuit and overload (DC) 7 Swapped connectors 7 Wire-break (connection L or L+), 7 Overvoltage peaks 7 Radio interference Spurious signal suppression When the operating voltage is applied, the "damped" status is simulated due to the transient condition of the sensor inductor even when an activation element is not present. Spurious signal suppression prevents the output switching during this period. Short-circuit and overload protection All DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are equipped with short-circuit and overload protection. Shortcircuits between the output and the operating voltage connections do not damage the proximity switches, and may be occur permanently; an unlimited overload is also permissible. For the duration of the short circuit, the LEDs are not functional. Polarity reversal protection All DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are protected against reverse polarity at all connections. Wire-break protection The DC version is designed such that when a wire-break occurs in any connection, the BERO does not output a faulty signal (not for 3RG46 and all 4-wire BEROs). A faulty signal is any non-zero signal that is active for more than ms and whose current is larger than the residual current. BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Inductive interference protection Introduction When inductive loads are disconnected, the output voltage rises (without protective elements) to high values whereby the output transistor can be destroyed. The BERO proximity switches are therefore equipped with a Zener diode at the output which limits the disconnection voltage to a safe value (3-wire BERO). When inductive loads are connected at currents > 100 ma and simultaneously a switching frequency > 10 Hz, it is recommended that a freewheeling diode is directly connected across the load (due to the power losses in the built-in Zener diode). Protection against radio interference The high-frequency susceptibility has been sufficiently reduced to comply with IEC , Level 3 (testing level 10 V/m). Protection against electrostatic charging The devices are constructed such that electrostatic charging to IEC , Level 3 (8 kv) does not damage the devices. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) All inductive BEROs meet the protection requirements of EMC guideline No. 89/336/ECC. This is verified by application of the standard EN and certified by the appropriate authority. The following EMC standards are applicable for the individual tests: EN , IEC-CISPR 11, EN 55 0, IEC-CISPR, IEC , Level 3, IEC , Level 3, IEC , Level 3, IEC , IEC Displays (LEDs) Most BEROs are equipped with one or two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates the operating status: BERO with NO function: BERO damped = LED lit BERO with NC function: BERO not damped = LED lit BERO with NO and NC function: BERO damped = LED lit. The green LED indicates that the operating voltage is applied. This function is only available in certain devices. Siemens FS /111

112 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction General technical specifications Differential travel H H 0. s r Max. permissible lead length (unshielded) AC 100 m DC 300 m Degree of protection With buried cable IP67 With connector and cable plug IP67 With terminal compartment IP65 BERO for extreme environment IP68 or IP69 K U BERO without reduction factor - With brass enclosure IP67 - With stainless steel enclosure IP68 Ambient temperature During operation C 1 ) ) During storage C 1 ) Shock resistance 30 g, 18 ms duration Resistance to vibration 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude Reduction factor BERO for flush/non-flush mounting (typical values) - Stainless steel Aluminum Copper Brass U BERO 1 Voltage drop -wire BERO 8 V 3-wire BERO.5 V 4-wire BERO.5 V 1) Up to +70 C with 3RG41 and 3RG46. ) Maximum switching current for three-wire BEROs for standard duty at operating temperatures >50 C is 150 ma. Fastening nuts Form Material Tightening torque nm M8 Brass Stainless steel 5 M1 Brass 10 Molded plastic 1 Stainless steel 5 M14 Molded plastic 0.5 M18 Brass 0 Molded plastic 3 Stainless steel 50 M30 Brass 40 Molded plastic 5 Stainless steel 100 Options Longer connection lines The 3RG4 inductive BEROs are available with longer connection lines (PUR). Delivery possibilities on request. Stainless steel enclosure Many 3RG4 cylindrical inductive BEROs (from M 1 upwards) with brass enclosure are also available in stainless steel. Delivery possibilities on request. Extended temperature range The 3RG40 BEROs are available for an operating temperature of 40 to +85 C or 5 to +100 C. Delivery possibilities on request. Special cables The 3RG40 and 3RG41 inductive BEROs (3RG46 on request) are also available with other types of cable; see table below. BERO Type of conductor Outer diameter Permissible conductor cross-section mm mm -wire LiYY11Y (PUR) PVC wire LiYY11Y (PUR) PVC PVC (oil-resistant) Teflon Silicone wire LiYY11Y (PUR) PVC PVC (oil-resistant) Teflon The Order No. must be supplemented by " Z", and the required type of cable and length specified in plain text. Delivery possibilities on request. /11 Siemens FS

113 Inductive BEROs Introduction Circuit diagrams Fig. 1 Fig. 11 Fig. 1 1 L+ 4 3 L NO+NC NSD0064 Fig. Fig. 1 Fig. 1 L+ BN L+ 4 BK 3 L BU L NO NO NSD00643 NC NSD00653 Fig. 3 Fig. 13 Fig. 3 NC NSD L+ L NO NSD00654 Fig. 4 Fig. 14 Fig. 4 NO NSD L+ L NC NSD00655 Fig. 5 Fig. 15 Fig. 5 1 L+ BN L+ NC NSD L NO NSD00656 Fig. 6 Fig. 16 Fig. 6 1 L+ BK L1/L+ (N/L ) BN BK BU BN BK BU BU L+ L L+ L L NO NSD0066 NSD00663 NSD00664 NSD00665 NC NO 1 / /4 3 1/3 /4 NC NO NO+NC NSD L+ L L+ L L+ L L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+) 4 1 L+ 1/3 X L L+ NO NSD L NO NSD00657 Fig. 7 Fig. 17 Fig. 7 NO NSD L+ L NC NSD00658 Fig. 8 Fig. 18 Fig. 8 3 L1/L+ 1 L+ N/L 4 4 N/L 3 L L1/L+ NO+NC NO NSD00649 NSD00659 Fig. 9 Fig. 19 Fig. 9 1 L1/L+ N/L BK BK BK 1 /4 N/L (L1/L+) L1/L+ (N/L ) N/L (L1/L+) L+ NSD00667 NSD00668 NO /4 1/3 X /4 NC NO L L+ L NC NSD00650 N/L L1/L+ Fig. 10 Fig. 0 Fig. 30 BN L+ 1 L+ WH /4 BK = BU L 3 L NC NO+NC NSD00651 Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC : BK = black BN = brown BU = blue WH = white NSD00660 NSD00661 NO 3 L NSD00669 BN 39 V BK WH 39 V BU +U B A1 A 0 V R L R L1 Siemens FS /113

114 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Typical circuits Parallel connection Series connection 1 ) Parallel circuit with 1 contact (NO or NC) DC voltage version -wire BEROs, for PLCs Not possible since the total of all Not possible since L BERO off-state currents must be U b 15 V smaller than the holding current of n the load 8 V BN U b PLC: 4 V BU L Series circuit with 1 contact (NO or NC) 1 ) L BN BU L NSD00671 NSD wire BEROs, pnp BN BK BU L BN BK BU L BN BK BU L L BN BK BU L BN BK BU BN BK BU NSD00675 NSD00674 Other connections are not permissible. NSD0067 L L 3-wire BEROs, npn BU BK BN NSD00673 L U b U n min V U c = U b (n.5 V) L BU BK BN L BU BK BN L L BU BK BN L BU BK BN BU BK BN NSD00679 NSD00678 NSD00676 L L 4-wire BEROs, pnp NSD00677 L U b U n min V U c = U b (n.5 V) AC/DC version L1(L ) L1(L ) L1(L ) BK BK L1(L ) BK BK BK BK N(L ) BK BK N(L ) NSD00680 BK BK N(L ) The total of all BERO off-state currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load NSD00681 U b = Operational voltage U c = Minimum operating voltage of the load n= Number of BEROs U min = Minimum permissible operational voltage 1) The power-up delay of the sensors must be considered when determining the switching times. n U b 0 V BK BK N(L ) U c = U b (n 8 V) NSD00683 With DC voltage operation, a diode must be connected in parallel to the primarily inductive load. NSD0068 Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC : BK = black BN = brown BU = blue WH = white /114 Siemens FS

115 Inductive BEROs Introduction Characteristics Response curves The response curves are determined using standard targets according to EN Operating distance 0.6 mm (normal) Operating distance 0.8 mm (normal) 3RG 46.0, 3RG 46 3RG46 03, 3RG46 00, 3RG Operating distance 1 mm (normal) 3RG40 11 Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG (shorty) Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal) 3RG , 3RG46 01, 3RG46 11, 3RG46 37 Operating distance 1.5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 11 Oper. distance mm (normal) 3RG40 1, 3RG40 5, 3RG40 7. Operating distance mm (extra duty) 3RG41 11 Oper. distance.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 1, 3RG40 60 Oper. distance.5 mm (normal) 3RG40 7 Operating distance.5 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 0, 3RG46 11 y mm,5 1,5 1 0,5 NSD0_01136a -x x mm mm Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 11 Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 0, 3RG46 37 Operating distance 3 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 1 Oper. distance 3 mm (pressuretight) 3RG46 5 Oper. distance 4 mm (normal) 3RG40, 3RG40 6 Operating distance 4 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 1 Operating distance 4 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 1 y mm 4 3 -x mm NSD0_0046 +x mm Siemens FS /115

116 Inductive BEROs Introduction Operating distance 5 mm (normal) 3RG40 13, 3RG40 53 Operating distance 5 mm (normal) 3RG40 8 Operating distance 5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 13 Operating distance 6 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 1, 3RG46 1 Operating distance mm (analog) 3RG46 1 Operating distance 8 mm (normal) 3RG40 3, 3RG40 63 Operating distance 8 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 13 Operating distance 8 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 Oper. distance 10 mm (normal) 3RG40 14, 3RG40 54, 3RG46 5 Operating distance 10 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 Operating distance 10 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 14 Operating distance 1 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 13 Operating distance 1 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 3 Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 4, 3RG40 31, 3RG Operating distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 30, 3RG40 34 Oper. distance 15 mm (normal) 3RG40 38 Operating distance 15 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 1 Operating distance 15 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 34, 3RG46 38 /116 Siemens FS

117 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Operating distance 0 mm (normal) 3RG40 41, 3RG46 6 Operating distance 0 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 3 Operating distance 0 mm (extra duty) 3RG 41 34, 3RG46 38 Operating distance 0 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 38 Operating distance 0 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 1 Operating distance mm (extra duty) 3RG46 14 Operating distance 5 mm (normal) 3RG40 3 Operating distance 5 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41 Operating distance 5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 44, 3RG46 48 Operating distance 30 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 4 Operating distance 30 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 44 Operating distance 35 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 48 Operating distance 35 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 48 Operating distance 40 mm (normal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 43 Operating distance 40 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 4 Operating distance 40 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 41 Operating distance 40 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 44 Operating distance 50 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 4 Operating distance 65 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 43 Operating distance 75 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 43 Siemens FS /117

118 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Further information Active surface The active surface of an inductive proximity switch is the surface through which an electromagnetic field is emitted (IEC). The corresponding activation element (target) is moved toward this surface to trigger a switching process. Axial approach Axial approaching of the target is where its center point is located in the reference axis (IEC). Axial distance to target x Distance between the actuating element and the BERO axis z at the response point A. BERO lexicon Some of the terms are defined in IEC Current input The current input is understood to be the current consumption of the proximity switch required to operate the oscillator, amplifier, etc. It does not include the current flowing through the load. The no-load current I 0 is the current drawn from the power supply without a load being connected. Differential travel H Distance between the switching points when the target approaches or is removed from the proximity switch (IEC). The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The switching distance always refers to the switchon point. Free zone Range around the proximity switch which must be kept free of materials which interfere with the characteristic features of the switch (IEC). The volume of the free zone is defined by the dimensions r, c and w, g (see graphic). Z J Z F Z B w A Q d z Ak Response characteristic A Response point c, g Height points of the transition zone d Diameter of the BERO Q Active area r Radius of the free zone w Installed state z Reference axis Z B Attenuation zone Z F Free zone Z J Inactive zone Ak r c g NSD01061 Installation Shielded proximity switches A proximity switch can be shielded if any attenuating material (metal) can be attached around the active surface without influencing the characteristic features (IEC). To ensure perfect functioning, a gap should be left in front of the active surface. Unshielded proximity switches A proximity switch cannot be shielded if a certain free zone is required around its active surface in order to retain the characteristic features (IEC). Semi-shielded proximity switches A proximity switch that is semi-shielded also requires a certain free zone. However, flush mounting is permissible in non-attenuating materials. Magnetic fields Permanent magnetic fields and low-frequency alternating fields do not generally influence the function of the proximity switches. Strong fields may saturate the ferrite core of the switch and thus increase the operating distance or switch the device. On the other hand, damage is not probable. High-frequency fields with frequencies of several hundred khz can considerably interfere with the function (operating frequency of the sensors). Shielding is recommended in the event of difficulties with interference fields. Non-equivalence The 4-wire BEROs have two outputs: A 1 with NO function and A with NC function. npn connection The output stage contains an npn transistor which connects the load to the negative operating voltage (0 V). The load is connected between the output and the positive operating voltage (+U B ). /118 Siemens FS

119 Operating temperature The specified operating temperature range must not be exceeded. The proximity switch could then be damaged, and the operating response is undefined. Operating distance The operating distance is the distance at which a change in signal is caused at the output when the target approaches the active surface along the reference axis (IEC). Measurement of the operating distance is carried out according to IEC using a standard target and axial approach. Rated operating distance s n The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defining the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC). This operating distance applies when using the standard target according to IEC Reduction factors must be considered if the material and/or size of the target differ from those of the standard target. Real operating distance s r Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC). This is the operating distance for a particular switch measured according to IEC The manufacturing tolerance is 10 %: 0.9 s n < s r < 1.1 s n Usable operating distance s u Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured under defined conditions (IEC). This includes the additionally expected deviations caused by the variations in temperature and operating voltage within the specified ranges. The usable operating distance is between 90 % and 110 % of the real operating distance. This results in the following for a reliable design: 0.81 s n < s u < 1.1 s n Ensured operating distance (actuation distance) s a Distance from the active surface at which actuation of the proximity switch is ensured under defined conditions (IEC). The ensured operating distance is between zero and the bottom value of the useful operating distance: 0 < s a < 0.81 s n s a s n s r s min s max Working distance Rated operating distance Real operating distance min. useful operating distance s u (= working distance s a ) max. useful operating distance s u Operational voltage The operating voltage is specified including 10 % residual ripple. BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Output The BERO proximity switches are available with different output connections. L+ L- -wire, DC or AC/DC, load connected in series with BERO L+ L- NSD wire, DC, pnp, load connected between A and L L+ L- NSD wire, DC, npn, load connected between A and L+ L+ L- A A A A1 NSD01056 NSD wire, antivalent, DC, load connected between A 1, A and L Output resistance The BERO proximity switches have a built-in output resistance so that the output voltage can follow the switching status even without an external load. A load resistance must be connected when operating with high switching frequencies (to reduce the electric time constant). Parallel connection Parallel connection of proximity switches to implement logical functions is possible with 3-wire and 4-wire BEROs without problem, but not with -wire BEROs. Please note: The power consumption increases. Leakage currents add up so that an impermissible voltage drop may occur at the load even in the off state. See graphics, Page 114. pnp connection The output stage contains a pnp transistor which connects the load to the positive operating voltage (+U B ). The load is connected between the output and the negative operating voltage (0 V). Siemens FS /119

120 BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction Power-up delay t v Duration between switching on the power supply and the beginning of the proximity switch s operational readiness (IEC). Power supply units Single-phase power supply units must be smoothed with at least 1000 µf/a. For noise suppression reasons, this measure is also necessary with three-phase power supply units. Programming Selection of NO or NC function using slide switch in bottom part of enclosure or plug-in jumper in the electronics base. Only with certain cubic BEROs. Rated operational current I e (output current) The sensors are designed for a specific maximum output current. If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload protection will be activated. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have effects similar to an overload. Reduction factors The specified operating distance s refers to exactly defined measuring conditions (see operating distance). Reduced operating distances usually result with other arrangements. The reduction factors (see Technical specifications) are only approximate values. Deviations may result depending on different alloys and the type. Influence of geometry If a smaller target is used than the standard target defined in IEC , the operating distance must be corrected by a reduction factor. Reference axis z Axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC). Residual voltage The residual voltage is the voltage measured across the load with the output disabled. Residual current i r The residual current is the current which flows in the load circuit of the proximity switch in the disabled condition (IEC). It is used to retain the function, and must primarily be observed with parallel connections. Residual ripple V The maximum value of the residual ripple from peak to peak must not exceed 10 % of the rated voltage U n. The switching response may be undefined if the residual ripple is large. Correction is possible using a larger smoothing capacitor or a regulated power supply. Release point B The position, e.g. in the attenuation zone, at which the bottom rear edge of the actuating element is located at the moment the signal changes when removing. Resistance to oil The proximity switches with degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for permanent operation in an environment containing oil. The following must therefore be observed: Lubricating oils Usually present no problem. Hydraulic oils, cutting oils These attack most plastics. In particular, the PVC lines become discolored and brittle. Measures: avoid contact with these liquids if possible, especially on the active surface. Response curve The line on which all response points A for a BERO can be found. The curve has been determined using the standard target. The sensor-related characteristics can be obtained from it. The BERO axis z coincides with the y axis. Ak A B H s x x y z Response characteristic Response point Release point Differential travel Operating distance Direction of motion Triggering distance Distance to BERO Reference axis Repeat accuracy R The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance s r at defined conditions (IEC). The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 3 C (± 5 C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage. The difference between any two measurements must not exceed 10 % of the real operating distance s r. The repeat accuracy is usually far better in the case of measurements immediately following one another. Response delay t A The response delay is the duration which the switching element requires for response when the target enters or leaves the sensing range (IEC). The value is measured at s = 0.5 s n. Response point A The position of the actuating element when the signal is output. The reference point is the bottom front edge of the actuating element. Series connection See graphics, Page 114. /10 Siemens FS

121 Smallest operating current I m (minimum load current) The current required to retain the conductivity of the switching elements in the ON state (IEC). This applies to -wire BEROs. Standard target The standard target is a defined part used for comparison measurements of the operating distances and sensing ranges (IEC). Material of standard target: St 37, 1 mm thick Dimensions of square standard target: the side length is equal to the diameter of the inscribed circle on the active surface of the BERO or three times the rated operating distance s n if 3 s n is greater than the diameter of the inscribed circle. Switching element function NO function An NO function results in a flow of load current when the target is sensed, and no flow of the load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). NC function An NC function results in no flow of load current when the target is sensed, and a flow of load current when the target is not sensed (IEC). Switching frequency f Number of switching operations of a proximity switch within a defined time interval (IEC). The switching frequency is the maximum possible switching rate between the damped and non-damped statuses at which the output circuit still delivers a defined signal sequence corresponding to the activation. Switching frequency s a See under operating distances. Target (actuating element) Parts made of metal with which BEROs are actuated in service. Form, material and dimensions influence the response characteristic of the BERO (see reduction factors). The specified rated operating distances s n were determined using the minimum surface defined in the standard (see characteristic). The usable operating distance s u is reduced if the surface is less than the minimum. Temperature drift The specified operating distances refer to an ambient temperature of 0 C. Within the permissible temperature range of 5 to +70 C, the operating distance varies by max. ±10 % compared to the value at 0 C. The temperature of the target alone has practically no influence on the operating distance. Tightening torque Excessive tightening of the nuts could mechanically damage the BERO proximity switches. The maximum permissible torques are specified in the Technical specifications. BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Introduction SIt specifies the maximum permissible number of pulses per second at a constant pulse : Pause = 1 : and half the rated operating distance sn. The measurement is carried out according to IEC Voltage drop A voltage drop (dependent on the current) occurs across the output transistor in the conductive state; the output voltage does not quite reach the associated operating voltage (to be particularly observed with a series connection and electronic inputs). Welding-resistant Sensors which can be used in strong magnetic fields, e.g. during arc welding, or in fields of electrolysis plants. The maximum permissible value is specified for specially selected sensors, e.g. U BERO. Siemens FS /11

122 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0.6 mm Class Standard IP68 IP68 No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 3 mm, mini Ø 4 mm, mini M 5, mini Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 0.6 mm 0.6 mm 0.6 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP68 IP68 Type 3RG46 03 AB00 3RG AG0 3RG AG0 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 03 AB00 3RG AG0 3RG AG0 NO contact, npn 13 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active area B = metal-free area A 5 B,4 A NSD0_00305 B 3RG46 03 AB00 3RG AG0 3RG AG0 /1 Siemens FS

123 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0.8 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form 5mm 5mm, mini Ø 4 mm, mini M 5, mini Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.8 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG AG00 3RG GB00 3RG AB00 3RG46 10.AG00 3RG46 10.GB00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG00 3RG AB00 3RG AG00 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB00 3RG GB00 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A, C 3RG AG00 NO contact, npn 4 A, C 3RG GB00 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on form A = active area B = metal-free area A 3,3 5 B,4 A 3,3 5 B,4 A NSD0_00311a A NSD0_00306a B B 3RG RG AB00 3RG RG Siemens FS /13

124 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1 mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire Form M 8 M 8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1 mm 1 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 1 Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 11.A.00 3RG40 11.GB00 3RG40 11.CC00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF00 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG CC00 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A, C 3RG AG00 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 B 3RG CC00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AF00 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 4 F 3RG CC00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG M 8x SW 13 NSD0031 LED A = active area B = metal-free area /14 Siemens FS

125 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (DC 65 V) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire Form M 8 M 8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1 mm 1 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 1,5 10 Rated operating current I e ma 5 00 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 11.JB00 3RG40 11.AB00 3RG40 11.AA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AA00 NO contact 15 3RG JB00 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AA00 NO contact 7 A 3RG JB00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG JB00 Mounting instructions 3RG JB00 3RG JB00 3RG JB00 3RG A.00 3RG A.00 3RG A.00 M 8x1 & N " 50 NSD SW 13 LED # & 5,! " 5 9! -, 5 C A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /15

126 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1.5 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 mm, mini Ø 6.5 mm, shorty Ø 6.5 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG RG40 50.A.33 3RG40 50.G.33 3RG40 50.A.05 3RG40 50.G.05 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 3RG AG33 3RG AG05 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 3RG AF05 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG GB05 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 3RG GA05 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG00 3RG AG33 3RG AG05 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF33 3RG AF05 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB00 3RG GB33 3RG GB05 NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG GA33 3RG GA05 Mounting instructions 3RG RG AB00 3RG RG RG RG RG RG40 50 A = active area B = metal-free area /16 Siemens FS

127 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1.5 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form M 8, mini Ø 8 mm, shorty 8 mm 8 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Stainless steel Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma (4 V); 30 (34 V) 10 Rated operating current I e ma ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG AG31 3RG RG40 51.A.33 3RG40 51.G.33 3RG46 37.A.00 3RG46 37.G.00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG31 3RG AG33 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG GG00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG31 3RG AG33 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF31 3RG AF33 3RG AA00 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB31 3RG GB33 3RG GG00 NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG GA33 Mounting instructions 3RG46 11, 3RG RG AG31 3RG RG RG RG M 8x1 16 NSD00338 SW 13 LED 3RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /17

128 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1.5 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 8, Shorty M8 M8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 1,0 Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 50 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 11.A.33 3RG40 11.G.33 3RG40 11.A.05 3RG40 11.G.05 3RG40 11.CC05 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 3RG AG05 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 3RG AF05 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG GB05 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 3RG GA05 NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG CC05 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG33 3RG AG05 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF33 3RG AF05 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB33 NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG GA33 NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 3RG CC05 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG05 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AF05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB05 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG GA05 NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 F 3RG CC05 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG RG & N M 8x1! # 5,! " 5 9! -, 50 NSD SW 13 LED A = active area B = metal-free area /18 Siemens FS

129 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1.5 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1.5 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 150 Switching frequency f Hz < 000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.16 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 Type 3RG46 11.AN01 3RG46 11.GN01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GN01 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GN01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN01 Mounting instructions 3RG N01 3RG N01 3RG N01 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /19

130 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Standard Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 1, Shorty M 1, Shorty M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm mm mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 1,0 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 1.A.33 3RG40 1 0CD10 3RG40 1.A.01 3RG40 1 0CD00 3RG40 1.G.33 3RG40 1 3CD11 3RG40 1.G.00 3RG40 1 3CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 1 0AG33 3RG40 1 0AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 1 0AF33 3RG40 1 0AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 1 0GB33 3RG40 1 0GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 1 0GA33 3RG40 1 0GA mm mm NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG40 1 0CD10 3RG40 1 0CD00 With M 1 connector 3-wire 3-wire NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 1 3AG33 3RG40 1 3AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 1 3AF33 3RG40 1 3AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 1 3GB33 3RG40 1 3GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 1 3GA33 4-wire 4-wire NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 F 3RG40 1 3CD11 3RG40 1 3CD00 Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG RG40 1 0CD10 3RG M 1x1 3RG NSD SW 17 LED 3RG RG40 1 3CD11 3RG RG /130 Siemens FS

131 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 1 M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 5/100 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 1.JB00 3RG40 1.AB00 3RG40 1.AA00 3RG40 1.KB00 3RG40 1.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 1 0AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 1 0AA00 NO contact 15 3RG40 1 0GB00 NO contact 16 3RG40 1 0KB00 NC contact 17 3RG40 1 0KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 1 3AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 1 3AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 1 3JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 1 3KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG40 1 3KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG40 1 0JB00 3RG40 1 3JB00 3RG40 1 0A.00 3RG40 1 3A.00 3RG40 1 0K.00 3RG40 1 3K.00 M 1x1 M 1x1 M 1x1 M 1x1 A = active area B = metal-free area The mounting diagram on the previous page applies to 3RG40 1.JB00 56 NSD LED SW NSD SW LED (4x) Sg 56 NSD LED SW NSD SW LED (4x) Sg Siemens FS /131

132 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 1 mm M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG40 5 0A.30 3RG40 5 0G.30 3RG40 1 0A.30 3RG40 1 0G.30 3RG40 1 0AG31 3RG40 1 0GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 5 0AG30 3RG40 1 0AG30 3RG40 1 0AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 5 0AF30 3RG40 1 0AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 5 0GB30 3RG40 1 0GB30 3RG40 1 0GB31 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 5 0GA30 3RG40 1 0GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area /13 Siemens FS

133 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (VW) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M 8, Shorty M 8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz (with 3AG: 1000) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG41 11.A.33 3RG41 11.AG00 3RG41 11.G.33 3RG AG Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm 3 m, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 3RG AG00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG33 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF33 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB33 NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG GA33 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG00 NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG RG & N M 8x1 & N! # 5,! " 5 9! -, 50 NSD SW 13 LED $ " 5,! # ' "! 5 9! -, 5 C A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /133

134 "! $ BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire Form Cubic 1 mm 40 mm Cubic 1 mm 3 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 1,0 Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 70.AG45 3RG CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG45 NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG CD00 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG45 Mounting instructions 3RG AG45 3RG CD00 A = active area B = metal-free area These BEROs can be mounted next to one another. 3RG AG45 -, $ & "! N #! 5 A I H? A JA H! " $ & N 5,! % % > /134 Siemens FS

135 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire Form Cubic 1 mm 40 mm Cubic 1 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n mm mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 70.A.01 3RG40 70.CD00, 3RG CD01, 3RG CD0 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF01 NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG CD00 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG01 NO and NC contacts, 1 A 3RG CD01 pnp; LED q NO NO and NC contacts, pnp; LED q NC 1 A 3RG CD0 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AF01 NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 F 3RG CD00 Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area These BEROs can be mounted next to one another. 3RG , 3RG RG , 3RG RG , 3RG Siemens FS /135

136 # # BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance.5 mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 mm M 8 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n.5 mm.5 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 60.A.00 3RG40 60.G.00 3RG40 1.CD00 Switching output Circ. Connector Order No. Order No. diag. No. type With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 3RG40 1 0AG33 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 3RG40 1 0AF33 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG40 1 0GB33 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 3RG40 1 0GA33 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG33 3RG40 1 7AG33 NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG AF33 3RG40 1 7AF33 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB33 3RG40 1 7GB33 NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG GA33 3RG40 1 7GA33 Mounting instructions * 3RG RG RG RG ) $ ) 5,! ' = A = active area B = metal-free area * /136 Siemens FS

137 Inductive BEROs Operating distance.5 mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire Form M 14 M 14 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n.5 mm.5 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 7.GB.00 3RG40 7.GA.00 3RG40 7.CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 7 0GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 7 0GA00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG40 7 0CD00 With M 1 connector NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 7 3GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 7 3GA00 NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 F 3RG40 7 3CD00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG Plan view NSD A = active area B = metal-free area These BEROs can be mounted next to one another. Siemens FS /137

138 Inductive BEROs Operating distance.5 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 14 M 14 M 14 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n.5 mm.5 mm.5 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 100 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /1000 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 7.JB00 3RG40 7.AB00 3RG40 7.AA00 3RG40 7.KB00 3RG40 7.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 7 0AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 7 0AA00 NO contact 15 3RG40 7 0JB00 NO contact 16 3RG40 7 0KB00 NC contact 17 3RG40 7 0KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 7 3AB00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 7 3JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 7 3KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG40 7 3KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG Plan view NSD A = active area B = metal-free area These BEROs can be mounted next to one another. /138 Siemens FS

139 Inductive BEROs Operating distance.5 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (IP68) Greater rated operating distance (IP68) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 mm M 8 Embeddable in metal Shielded Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n,5 mm,5 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 IP68 Type 3RG46 0 0AG0 3RG AG0 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 0 0AG0 3RG AG0 Mounting instructions 3RG46 0 3RG46 0 0AG0 3RG AG0 3RG46 11 A = active area B = metal-free area X 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal Siemens FS /139

140 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 3 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 6.5 mm M 8 Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 3 mm 3 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG46 0.AB00, 3RG46 0.AG01 3RG46 11.AG01 3RG46 0.GB01 3RG46 11.GB01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 0 1AB00 3RG AG01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB01 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG46 0 7AG01 3RG AG01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB01 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on design A = active area B = metal-free area X 1.3 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.65 mm when mounted in other metal X 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal 3RG46 0 1AB01 3RG46 0 7AG01 3RG RG RG /140 Siemens FS

141 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 3 mm Class Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form 8mm 8mm Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 3 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 1000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.15 Power-up delay t v ms 50 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG46 37.AG01 3RG46 37.GB01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB01 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG01 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG GB01 Mounting instructions 3RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area X.4 mm when mounted in steel, X 1. mm when mounted in other metal Siemens FS /141

142 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 3 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 1 Embeddable in metal Shielded Rated operating distance s n 3 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 3000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.04 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46 1.AN.. 3RG46 1.GN.. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 1 0AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 1 0GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 1 0AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 1 0GN61 With M 1 connector Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 1 3AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 1 3GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 1 3AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 1 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 1 3AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG46 1 3GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG N.. 3RG N.. M 1x1 4 5 SW 17 LED Sg NSD00414 A = active area B = metal-free area /14 Siemens FS

143 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 3 mm, pressure resistant up to 500 bar Class Pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (750 psi) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 14 Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 3 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel, sensor surface aluminium oxide ceramic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.1 Power-up delay t v ms 10 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 Type 3RG46 5.P.00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 5 0PG00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG46 5 0PF00 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 5 0PB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG46 5 0PA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 5 3PG00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG46 5 3PF00 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 5 3PB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG46 5 3PA00 Mounting instructions 3RG46 5 0P.00 1,3 3RG46 5 3P.00 1,3 18,6 30 M 14 x 1,5 18,6 30 M 14 x 1,5 56,5 NSD0_00409a 65 NSD0_00408a Sg A = active area B = metal-free area X.4 mm when mounted in steel, X 1. mm when mounted in other metal SW 19 SW 19 M 1x1 Siemens FS /143

144 " " BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Class Standard Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 1, Shorty M 1, Shorty M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 1,0 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40.A.33 3RG40.G.33 3RG40 0CD10 3RG40 3CD11 3RG40.A.01 3RG40.G.00 3RG40 0CD00 3RG40 3CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 0AG33 3RG40 0AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 0AF33 3RG40 0AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 0GB33 3RG40 0GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 0GA33 3RG40 0GA mm mm NO and NC contacts, pnp 10 3RG40 0CD10 3RG40 0CD00 With M 1 connector 3-wire 3-wire NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 3AG33 3RG40 3AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 3AF33 3RG40 3AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 3GB33 3RG40 3GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 3GA33 3RG40 3GA00 4-wire 4-wire NO and NC contacts, pnp 1 F 3RG40 3CD11 3RG40 3CD00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG40 0CD10 3RG N N 3RG RG RG N A = active area B = metal-free area! # $ # " 5, " % -, 5 9 % 3RG N " $ # 5, " " " 5 9 % -, 3RG40 3CD11 N $ # $ # 5, " 5 9 % # " -, " N 5 C " # $ # " 5 9 %! "! ' $ # " 5, " & -, " N 5 C # 5, " " &? 5 9 % -, " N 5 C /144 Siemens FS

145 "! $ BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Class Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form Cubic 1 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz 800 Repeat accuracy R mm 0. Power-up delay t v ms 40 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG40 80.AG45 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG45 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG AG45 Mounting instructions 3RG AG45 3RG AG45 -, $ & "! N #! 5 A I H? A JA H! " $ & N 5,! % % > A = active area B = metal-free area These BEROs can be mounted next to one another. Siemens FS /145

146 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 1 M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At DC 4 V ma At AC 30 V ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 100 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /900 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40.JB00 3RG40.AB00 3RG40.AA00 3RG40.KB00 3RG40.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 0AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 0AA00 NO contact 15 3RG40 0JB00 NO contact 16 3RG40 0KB00 NC contact 17 3RG40 0KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 3AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 3AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 3JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 3KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG40 3KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG40 0JB00 3RG40 3JB00 3RG40 0A.00 3RG40 3A.00 3RG40 0K.00 3RG40 3K.00 N A = active area B = metal-free area " $ # $ # 5, " 5 9 % # " -, " N 5 C /146 Siemens FS

147 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 1 mm M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG40 6 0A.30 3RG40 6 0G.30 3RG40 0A.30 3RG40 0G.30 3RG40 0AG31 3RG40 0GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 6 0AG30 3RG40 0AG30 3RG40 0AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 6 0AF30 3RG40 0AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 0GB33 3RG40 0GB30 3RG40 0GB31 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 6 0GA30 3RG40 0GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /147

148 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M 1 M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm 4 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 100 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz 800 5/900 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG40.AB30 3RG40.KB30 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 0AB30 NO contact 16 3RG40 0KB30 Mounting instructions 3RG40 0AB30 M 1x1 3RG40 0KB30 M 1x1 56 NSD SW LED NSD SW 17 LED A = active area B = metal-free area /148 Siemens FS

149 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (VW) Greater rated operating distance (VW) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M 1, Shorty M 1 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm 4 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG41 1.AG33 3RG41 1.A.01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG41 1 0AG33 3RG41 1 0AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG41 1 0AF01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG41 1 3AG33 3RG41 1 3AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG41 1 3AF01 Mounting instructions 3RG41 1 0AG33 3RG41 1 3AG33 3RG41 1 0A.01 3RG41 1 3A.01 M 1x1 35 NSD00366 SW 17 LED A = active area B = metal-free area 4 Siemens FS /149

150 & & BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 4 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M8 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 4 mm Enclosure material Stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 150 Switching frequency f Hz < 000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.16 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 Type 3RG46 11.AN01 3RG46 11.GN01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 1 0AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 1 0GN01 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG46 1 7AN01 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 1 7GN01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 1 3AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 1 3GN01 Mounting instructions % * 3RG N01 3RG N01 3RG N01 ) $ ) 5, " ' * A = active area B = metal-free area /150 Siemens FS

151 " BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 18, Shorty M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 13.A.33, 3RG40 13.G.33 3RG40 13.A.01, 3RG40 13.G.00 3RG40 13.CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 3RG GA00 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG CD00 pnp With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG33 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AF33 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB33 3RG GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG GA33 3RG GA00 NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG CD00 pnp Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG & N 3RG " #! 5, " # $ > N 5 9 "! " -, " N 3RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /151

152 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class Standard Standard Extra duty (65 V DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire Form Ø 18 mm (button) M 14 M 14 Embeddable in metal Shielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm (3. mm) 5 mm,5 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 1,5 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 10 Rated operating current I e ma ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms 1, Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG RG40 8.CD00 3RG40 8.AB00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 13 3RG40 8 0AB00 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG40 8 0CD00 pnp With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp 4 E, F 3RG40 8 3AB00 NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG40 8 3CD00 pnp With single conductors, 0.5 m, mm PVC NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AJ00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AH00 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GJ00 Mounting instructions 3RG40 8 A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG RG RG Plan view Mounting instructions NSD RG GJ00 also possible with non-embedded mounting: Rated operating distance s n = 3. mm /15 Siemens FS

153 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 18 M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 5/490 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 13.JB00 3RG40 13.AB00, 3RG40 13.AA00 3RG40 13.KB00, 3RG40 13.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AA00 NO contact 15 3RG JB00 NO contact 16 3RG KB00 NC contact 17 3RG KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /153

154 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 18 mm M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm 5 mm 5 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG AG31, 3RG GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG30 3RG AG30 3RG AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF30 3RG AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB30 3RG GB30 3RG GB31 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA30 3RG GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area 54 NSD00459 LED /154 Siemens FS

155 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 18 Embeddable in metal Shielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.1 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46 13.AN.., 3RG46 13.GN.. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GN61 With M 1 connector Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG N.. 3RG N.. A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /155

156 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 6 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M 8 M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 6 mm 6 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG46 1.A.0, 3RG46 1.A.01, 3RG46 1.G.0 3RG46 1.G.01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 1 0AG0 3RG46 1 0AG01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 1 0GB0 3RG46 1 0GB01 With 8 mm combined connector NO contact, pnp A 3RG46 1 7AG0 NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 1 7GB0 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 1 3AG0 3RG46 1 3AB01 NO contact, nnn E, F 3RG46 1 3GB0 3RG46 1 3GB01 Mounting instructions Dimension depending on design A = active area B = metal-free area X.4 mm when mounted in steel, X 1. mm when mounted in other metal 3RG RG RG RG RG /156 Siemens FS

157 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 to 6 mm, with analog output Class Analog output No. of connecting wires 4-wire Form M 1 Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Switching frequency f Hz 1000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.3 Power-up delay t v ms 50 Output voltage (A1) at 5 C With s = 0 mm V 0 ( V) With s = 3 mm V +.7 (±0. V) With s = 6 mm V +5.0 (±0. V) Load current at voltage output Max. 10 ma Output current (A) at 5 C With s = 0 mm ma 1.0 (±0. ma) With s = 6 mm ma 5.0 (±0. ma) Max. resistive load at current output With U B = 10 V kω 1 With U B = 30 V kω 5 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG46 1.NB00 Analog output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Voltage + current 30 3RG46 1 0NB00 With M 1 connector Voltage + current 30 F 3RG46 1 3NB00 Mounting instructions 3RG46 1 0NB00 3RG46 1 3NB00 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /157

158 " BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 18, Shorty M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 3.A.33, 3RG40 3.G.33 3RG40 3.A.01, 3RG40 3.G.00 3RG40 3.CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 3 0AG33 3RG40 3 0AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 3 0AF33 3RG40 3 0AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 3 0GB33 3RG40 3 0GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 3 0GA33 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG40 3 0CD00 pnp With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 3 3AG33 3RG40 3 3AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 3 3AF33 3RG40 3 3AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 3 3GB33 3RG40 3 3GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 3 3GA33 NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG40 3 3CD00 pnp Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG & N & N 3RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area! # # 5, # = -, 5 9 " " " #! # 5, #! > N 5 9 "! " -, " N /158 Siemens FS

159 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 18 M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At DC 4 V ma At AC 30 V ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /340 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 3.JB00 3RG40 3.AB00, 3RG40 3.AA00 3RG40 3.KB00, 3RG40 3.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 3 0AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 3 0AA00 NO contact 15 3RG40 3 0JB00 NO contact 16 3RG40 3 0KB00 NC contact 17 3RG40 3 0KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 3 3AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 3 3AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 3 3JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 3 3KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG40 3 3KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /159

160 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 18 mm M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG40 3 0A.30, 3RG40 3 0G.30 3RG40 3 0AG31, 3RG40 3 0GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG30 3RG40 3 0AG30 3RG40 3 0AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF30 3RG40 3 0AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB30 3RG40 3 0GB30 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA30 3RG40 3 0GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area 54 NSD00459 LED /160 Siemens FS

161 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M 18 M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 8 mm 8 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz 500 5/340 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG40 3 0AB30 3RG40 3 0KB30 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 3 0AB30 NO contact 16 3RG40 3 0KB30 Mounting instructions 3RG40 3 0AB30 3RG40 3 0KB30 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /161

162 " BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Class Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 18 Embeddable in metal Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material Shielded 8 mm Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 500 Repeat accuracy R mm 0. Power-up delay t v ms 3 Switching status display Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection Type Brass, nickel-plated Yellow LED IP67 3RG41 13.AG01, 3RG41 13.AG33 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 With 3 m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG33 3RG AG01 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG & N M 18x1 " #! 5, " # $ > N 5 9 "! " -, " N NSD01067 SW 4 4 A = active area B = metal-free area LED /16 Siemens FS

163 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 8 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 1 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 8 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 1 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.16 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46.AN.., 3RG46.GN.. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 0AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 0GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 0AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 0GN61 With M 1 connector Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 3GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG46 3GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG46 0.N.. M 1x1 3RG46 3.N.. 10 A = active area B = metal-free area NSD00489 SW 17 4 LED Siemens FS /163

164 # BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 30, Shorty M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 14.A.33, 3RG40 14.G.33 3RG40 14.A.01, 3RG40 14.G.00 3RG40 14.CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG33 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF33 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB33 3RG GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA33 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG CD00 pnp With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG33 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AF33 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB33 3RG GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG GA33 NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG CD00 pnp Mounting instructions 3RG A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG RG RG ! N #! N # 3RG ! # 5, #! > 5 9! $ # -, " #! 5, # " > N! " 5 9! $ -, " N 3RG RG /164 Siemens FS

165 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Class Normal (Mercedes-Benz) Standard Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire -wire Form M 30 Ø 0 mm Ø 0 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma /100 0 ms ma 00 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /70 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP65 Type 3RG CD01 3RG46 5 6AG00 3RG46 5 6KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M 1 connector NO and NC contacts, pnp Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. 1 F 3RG CD01 With terminal compartment mm mm NO contact, pnp 6 3RG46 5 6AG00 NO or NC contact 4 3RG46 5 6KD00 programmable Mounting instructions Dimension depending on type A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG CD01 3RG M 30 1, NSD0_0058 SW M 1 1 Siemens FS /165

166 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 30 M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /00 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 14.JB00 3RG40 14.AB00, 3RG40 14.AA00 3RG40 14.KB00, 3RG40 14.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AA00 NO contact 15 3RG JB00 NO contact 16 3RG KB00 NC contact 17 3RG KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area /166 Siemens FS

167 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 30 mm M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG AG31, 3RG GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG30 3RG AG30 3RG AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF30 3RG AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB30 3RG GB30 3RG GB31 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA30 3RG GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG ! A = active area B = metal-free area # " 5, # # = -, Siemens FS /167

168 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0. Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46 14.AN.., 3RG46 14.GN.. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Messing, verchromt NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GN61 With M 1 connector Messing, verchromt NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG N.. 3RG N.. A = active area B = metal-free area /168 Siemens FS

169 " " BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 10 mm Operating distance 1 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form M 1 M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 10 mm 1 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG46 0AG0, 3RG46 3AB03 3RG41 1.A.01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 0AG0 3RG AB01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3AB03 3RG AB01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB01 Mounting instructions 3RG46 3RG46 0AG0 3RG46 3AB03 3RG RG N N # # % 5, #! = 5 9 %! % -, $ # % 5, # " = 5 9 % -, 5 C! % 3RG46 13 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /169

170 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 1 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 18 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 1 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 1 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 000 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.4 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46 3.AN.., 3RG46 3.GN.. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Messing, verchromt NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 3 0AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 3 0GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 3 0AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 3 0GN61 With M 1 connector Messing, verchromt NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3 3AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 3 3GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3 3AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 3 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3 3AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG46 3 3GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG N.. 3RG N.. A = active area B = metal-free area /170 Siemens FS

171 # BERO Proximity Switches Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class Standard Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 30, Shorty M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 4.A.33, 3RG40 4.G.33 3RG40 4.A.01, 3RG40 4.G.00 3RG40 4.CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 4 0AG33 3RG40 4 0AG01 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 4 0AF33 3RG40 4 0AF01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 4 0GB33 3RG40 4 0GB00 NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 4 0GA33 3RG40 4 0GA00 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG40 4 0CD00 pnp With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 4 3AG33 3RG40 4 3AG01 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 4 3AF33 3RG40 4 3AF01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 4 3GB33 3RG40 4 3GB00 NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 4 3GA33 NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG40 4 3CD00 pnp Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area # 3RG RG RG ! N #! N # 3RG ! # $ 5, # # = -, 5 9! $ " #! $ 5, # # > N! # 5 9! $ -, " N 3RG RG Siemens FS /171

172 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class Standard Normal (Mercedes-Benz) Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 4-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) 30 (4 V); 40 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP67 Type 3RG A.01, 3RG GB00 3RG CD00, 3RG CD00 3RG CD00, 3RG GD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With M1 connector, rotatable NO and NC contacts, 1 F 3RG CD00 pnp NO and NC contacts, F 3RG GD00 npn With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 19 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 0 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 1 3RG GB00 NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG CD00 pnp Version for Mercedes-Benz NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG CD00 pnp Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG " " # $ " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. " 5, # $ " = 3RG & " # $ " " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor. " 5, # % = 3RG The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector. /17 Siemens FS

173 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form M 30 M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /0 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG40 4.JB00 3RG40 4.AB00, 3RG40 4.AA00 3RG40 4.KB00, 3RG40 4.KA00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR 0.5 mm mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 4 0AB00 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG40 4 0AA00 NO contact 15 3RG40 4 0JB00 NO contact 16 3RG40 4 0KB00 NC contact 17 3RG40 4 0KA00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG40 4 3AB00 NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 4 3AA00 NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 4 3JB00 NO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 4 3KB00 NC contact 9 F 3RG40 4 3KA00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG RG A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /173

174 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operational current Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency Hz /150 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy mm Power-up delay ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP65 Type 3RG JB00 3RG AD00 3RG KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm mm NO contact 3RG JB00 NO or NC contact 3 3RG AD00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 4 3RG KD00 Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG JB00, 3RG KD00 " # $ " " " #! -, ; - %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ = 3RG AD00 " " $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = /174 Siemens FS

175 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class Extra duty (AC/DC) Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm M 30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma (4 V); 30 (34 V) At 30 V AC ma.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 0 ms ma Minimum load current ma Switching frequency f Hz 5/50 (AC/DC) 300 Repeat accuracy R mm Differential travel H mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG KB00 3RG41 14.AG01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With 3 m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG01 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AG01 With M 1 connector, rotatable NO contact 8 E, F 3RG KB00 Mounting instructions 3RG RG AG01 3RG AG01 A = active area B = metal-free area The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector. Siemens FS /175

176 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wire Form Ø 30 mm M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) 17 (4 V); 30 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG A.30, 3RG G.30 3RG40 4 0A.30, 3RG40 4 0G.30 3RG40 4 0AG31, 3RG40 4 0GB31 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm PVC, mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AG30 3RG40 4 0AG30 3RG40 4 0AG31 NC contact, pnp 1 3RG AF30 3RG40 4 0AF30 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB30 3RG40 4 0GB30 3RG40 4 0GB31 NC contact, npn 14 3RG GA30 3RG40 4 0GA30 Mounting instructions 3RG RG RG ! A = active area B = metal-free area # " 5, # # = -, /176 Siemens FS

177 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form M 30 M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz 300 5/0 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG40 4 0AB30 3RG40 4 0KB30 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm 0.5 mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 4 0AB30 NO contact 16 3RG40 4 0KB30 Mounting instructions 3RG40 4 0AB30 3RG40 4 0KB30 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /177

178 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /150 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K Type 3RG CD0. 3RG AB0., 3RG AA0. 3RG KB0., 3RG KA0. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm mm 0.5 mm Sensor in longitudinal axis NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 NC contacts, pnp 1 3RG AA00 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG CD00 pnp NO contact 16 3RG KB00 NC contact 17 3RG KA00 Sensor 90 to longitudinal axis NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB01 NC contacts, pnp 1 NO and NC contacts, 10 3RG CD01 pnp NO contact 16 3RG KB01 NC contact 17 3RG KA01 Mounting instructions 3RG A = active area B = metal-free area /178 Siemens FS

179 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 15 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Rated operating distance s n 15 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 15 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.3 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection IP68 Type 3RG N01, 3RG N01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M 1 connector Connector type Order No. Order No. NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN01 NO contacts, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN01 With terminal compartment mm NO contact, pnp 8 3RG AN01 NO contacts, npn 9 3RG GN01 Mounting instructions 3RG46 38 " & * 3RG N01 3RG N01 " " $ " " ) ) * 3RG46 34 " # 5, # $ ' = 0 80 B " $ #! -, %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # ' % = # A 45 NSD0_00565 A B A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /179

180 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Class Standard Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Ø 34 mm Ø 34 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm 0 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At DC 4 V ma At AC 30 V ma.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 50/100 0 ms ma 00 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz 350 0/70 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms 0 0 Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Type 3RG46 6 6AD00 3RG46 6 6KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm NO or NC selectable, 6 3RG46 6 6AD00 pnp NO or NC contact programmable 4 3RG46 6 6KD00 Mounting instructions 3RG A = active area B = metal-free area /180 Siemens FS

181 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Class Standard Standard No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm 0 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 5 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Type 3RG A.01, 3RG GB00 3RG CD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment NO contact, pnp 19 3RG AG01 NC contact, pnp 0 3RG AF01 NO contact, npn 1 3RG GB00 NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG CD00 pnp Mounting instructions 3RG " " A = active area B = metal-free area $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = Siemens FS /181

182 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires -wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At DC 4 V ma At AC 30 V ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /100 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP65 Type 3RG JB00 3RG AD00 3RG KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm mm NO contact 3RG JB00 NO or NC contact 3 3RG AD00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 4 3RG KD00 Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG JB00, 3RG KD00 " # $ " " " #! -, ; - %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ = 3RG AD00 " " $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = /18 Siemens FS

183 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wire Form M 18 Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma (4 V); 50 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm 1.0 % 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP65 Type 3RG46 3.AB0, 3RG46 3.GB0 3RG AG01, 3RG GB01 3RG CD01 Switching output Circ. Connector diag. No. type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 3 0AB0 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 3 0GB0 With M1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 3 3AB0 B 3RG AG01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 3 3GB0 B 3RG GB01 With terminal compartment mm NO and NC contacts, pnp 18 3RG CD01 Mounting instructions 3RG46 3 3RG46 38, 3RG RG RG RG RG CD01 " & " # $ " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor " 5, # % = A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /183

184 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire -wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm 0 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma 30 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 1.5 At U max ma.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 00 0 ms ma Minimum load current ma < Switching frequency f Hz 30 5/30 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Differential travel H mm 0, ,3 0, ,3 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG CD00, 3RG GD00 3RG KB00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M1 connector NO and NC contacts, pnp NO and NC contacts, npn Connector type Order No. 1 F 3RG CD00 F 3RG GD00 Order No. NO contact 8 F 3RG KB00 Mounting instructions 3RG A = active area B = metal-free area The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector /184 Siemens FS

185 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 0 mm Switching output Circ. diag. No. Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 0 mm Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 13 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 1500 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.4 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mt r.m.s. Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Brass enclosure IP67 Stainless steel enclosure IP68 Type 3RG46 4.AN.., 3RG46 4.GN.. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 4 0AN01 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 4 0GN01 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 4 0AN61 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 4 0GN61 With M 1 connector Brass, chrome-plated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 4 3AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 4 3GN01 Brass, teflon-coated NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 4 3AN05 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 4 3GN05 Stainless steel NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 4 3AN61 NO contact, npn E, F 3RG46 4 3GN61 Mounting instructions 3RG N.. 3RG N.. A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /185

186 Inductive BEROs Operating distance mm Class Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 30 Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 100 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.1 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG46 14.AB00, 3RG46 14.GB00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG AB00 NO contact, npn 13 3RG GB00 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB00 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GB00 Mounting instructions! % & * 3RG RG ) $ $ $ ) 5, # '! = A = active area B = metal-free area * /186 Siemens FS

187 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class Standard Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V) No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire Form Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Semi-shielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm 5 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) 0 Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) 300 Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Type 3RG40 3 6CD00 3RG AD0. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG AD00 NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG40 3 6CD00 pnp Version for Opel (increased EMC) NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG AD04 Mounting instructions 3RG40 3 3RG40 3 6CD00 $ " # C! # 3RG AD0. " " % % " # " # -, ; - -, / #! " 5, $ = $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = 3RG41 31 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /187

188 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 5 mm Class No. of connecting wires Form Embeddable in metal Rated operating distance s n Enclosure material U BERO (without reduction factor) 3-wire Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Unshielded 5 mm Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 15 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R mm 0.5 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Displays Switching status Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection Type Yellow LED Green LED Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mt r.m.s. IP68 3RG N01, 3RG N0 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M 1 connector Connector type Order No. Order No. NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN01 With terminal compartment mm NO contact, pnp 8 3RG AN0 NO contact, npn 9 3RG GN0 Mounting instructions A = active area B = metal-free area 3RG N01 3RG N0 " " " $ " $ " #! -, %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # ' % = # /188 Siemens FS

189 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 30 mm Class Standard Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 30 mm 30 mm 30 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) 40 1,0 At 30 V AC ma 1,5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /60 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP65 Type 3RG40 4 6CD00 3RG40 4 6AD00 3RG40 4 6KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm mm NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG40 4 6CD00 pnp NO or NC contact 3 3RG40 4 6AD00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 4 3RG40 4 6KD00 Mounting instructions 3RG40 4 6CD00, 3RG40 4 6AD00 " # $ " # -, ; - C! # 3RG40 4 6KD00 " # $ " # -, ; - C! # A = active area B = metal-free area % % " # -, / #! " 5, $ = % % " # #! " 5, $ $ = Siemens FS /189

190 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 30 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (Mercedes-Benz) No. of connecting wires 4-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 30 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) Rated operating current I e ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) Switching frequency f Hz 30 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms 100 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 Type 3RG CD01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With terminal compartment mm NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG CD01 pnp Mounting instructions 3RG CD01 " " A = active area B = metal-free area & " # $ " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor 5, # % = /190 Siemens FS

191 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 35 mm Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire -wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 35 mm 35 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma 30 (4 V); 40 (34 V) 1.5 At U max ma.0 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ms ma Minimum load current ma < Switching frequency f Hz 30 5/30 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Differential travel H mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 IP67 Type 3RG CD00, 3RG GD00 3RG KB00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M1 connector NO and NC contacts, pnp NO and NC contacts, npn Connector type Order No. 1 F 3RG CD00 F 3RG GD00 Order No. NO contact 8 F 3RG KB00 Mounting instructions 3RG A = active area B = metal-free area The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector Siemens FS /191

192 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 35 mm Operating distance 40 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 35 mm 40 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms 8 8 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mt r.m.s. Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection IP68 IP68 Type 3RG N11 3RG N01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M 1 connector Connector type Order No. Order No. NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AN11 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG GN11 With terminal compartment mm NO contact, pnp 8 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 9 3RG GN01 Mounting instructions 3RG N11 3RG N11 3RG N01 " " $ " " " $ #! -, %! #!! " The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # ' % = # 3RG N01 A = active area B = metal-free area /19 Siemens FS

193 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 40 mm Class Standard Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 40 mm 40 mm 40 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma 30 (4 V); 50 (34 V) At 30 V AC ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma 00 ( 50 C); 150 ( 85 C) ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz /60 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 IP65 Type 3RG CD00 3RG AD00 3RG KD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm mm NO and NC contacts, 18 3RG CD00 pnp NO or NC contact 3 3RG AD00 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 4 3RG KD00 Mounting instructions 3RG CD00, 3RG AD00 3RG KD00 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /193

194 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 40 mm Class Extra duty (65 V DC/ Ford) Extra duty (AC/DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire -wire Form Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded/shielded Unshielded/shielded Rated operating distance s n 30 mm / 40 mm 30 mm / 40 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage DC V AC V No-load supply current I 0 At 4 V DC ma At U max ma 1.5 Rated operating current I e Continuous ma ms ma 1800 Minimum load current ma 5 Switching frequency f Hz 10 5/60 (AC/DC) Repeat accuracy R mm Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Type 3RG AD01 3RG KD01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm NO or NC contact 3 3RG AD01 selectable, pnp NO or NC contact selectable 4 3RG KD01 Mounting instructions Operating distance 30 mm 3RG AD01 3RG KD01 Operating distance 40 mm A = active area B = metal-free area /194 Siemens FS

195 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 40 mm Class Greater rated operating distance No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form M 30 Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 40 mm Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 10 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 100 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.1 Power-up delay t v ms 00 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG46 4.AB0, 3RG46 4.GB0 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With m cable, PUR mm NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 4 0AB0 NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 4 0GB0 With M 1 connector NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG46 4 3AB0 NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 4 3GB0 Mounting instructions 3RG RG ! N # 5 9! $ " " A = active area B = metal-free area %! # # # 5, $ ' > -, 5 C Siemens FS /195

196 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 40 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 40 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 0 Rated operating current I e ma 300 Switching frequency f Hz 0 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms 100 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 Type 3RG AB03, 3RG AD0. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With terminal compartment mm NO contact, pnp 19 3RG AB03 NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG AD00 Version for Opel (increased EMC) NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG AD04 Mounting instructions 3RG A.0. " " A = active area B = metal-free area $ " # " #! -, ; - -, / %! #!! " # The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 5, # $ " = /196 Siemens FS

197 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 40 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form Cubic 40 mm 40 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 5 mm or 40 mm, selectable Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 0 Rated operating current I e ma 300 Switching frequency f Hz 0 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms 100 Displays Switching status Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG AB0. Switching output Circ. diag. No. With M 1 connector Connector type Order No. NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB0 Connector can be offset in steps of 30 NO contact, pnp E, F 3RG AB01 Mounting instructions Operating distance 5 mm Operating distance 40 mm 3RG AB0 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. 3RG AB01 The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /197

198 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 50 mm Operating distance 65 mm Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC) Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC) No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire Form Cubic 60 mm 80 mm Cubic 80 mm 100 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 50 mm 65 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 0 0 Rated operating current I e ma Switching frequency f Hz 0 10 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Power supply Green LED Green LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference protection Radio interference protection Degree of protection IP65 IP65 Type 3RG41 4 6AD00 3RG AD00 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. With terminal compartment mm mm NO or NC contact selectable, pnp 3 3RG41 4 6AD00 3RG AD00 Mounting instructions 3RG41 4 3RG41 4 6AD00 % % " # " # $ " # -, ; - -, / #! C! # " 5, $ = 3RG AD00 3RG41 43 A = active area B = metal-free area /198 Siemens FS

199 Inductive BEROs Operating distance 75 mm Class U BERO (without reduction factor) No. of connecting wires 3-wire Form Cubic 80 mm 80 mm Embeddable in metal Unshielded Rated operating distance s n 75 mm Enclosure material Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V No-load supply current I 0 ma 15 Rated operating current I e ma 00 Switching frequency f Hz 50 Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 Power-up delay t v ms 8 Switching status display Yellow LED Protective measures Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof Reverse polarity protection Wire-break protection Inductive interference Magnetic field resistant up to 75 mt r.m.s. protection Radio interference protection Protective insulation Degree of protection IP67 Type 3RG AN01, 3RG GN01 Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. With terminal compartment mm NO contact, pnp 8 3RG AN01 NO contact, npn 9 3RG GN01 Mounting instructions 3RG N01 A = active area B = metal-free area Siemens FS /199

200 Introduction Application BERO Proximity Switches Capacitive BEROs 7 The DC versions can activate electronic controllers (SIMATIC) or relays directly. 7 With the AC version, the load (contactor relay, solenoid valve) is connected directly to the AC supply network (preferably 30 V, 50 Hz) in series with the BERO. Functions The sensing face of a capacitive sensor is formed by two concentrically arranged metal electrodes that are equivalent to the electrodes of an unwound capacitor. The electrode surfaces A and B are connected into the feedback branch of a high-frequency oscillator that is tuned such that it does not oscillate when the surface is free. A+ BERO 3RG16 capacitive proximity switches are position switches that operate without contact. They detect electrically conductive or non-conductive materials that are in a solid, powder or liquid state, e.g. glass, ceramics, plastic, wood, oil, water, cardboard and paper. The BERO switches when the material is at a specific distance from the sensor. Standard applications for BERO capacitive proximity switches are 7 Level control in plastic or glass containers 7 Level monitoring in transparent packaging 7 Winding wire breakage signaling 7 Tape breakage signaling 7 Bottle counting 7 Tape loop control and tape tension control 7 Item counting of any kind. Examples B- NSD0071 When an object approaches the active face of the sensor, it enters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces and causes a change in the coupling capacitance. The oscillator starts to oscillate; the amplitude is recorded by an evaluation circuit and converted into a switching command. Switching frequency The build-up characteristics specific to other pulse/interval conditions may result in higher switching frequencies than those specified. Operating distance The stated values are applicable to a target of metal which is grounded and whose area corresponds to the sensing face of the BERO. The real operating distance s r for non-conductive targets is dependent on the relative dielectric constant ε r and the characteristic value (see characteristic curve below). 80 r Recognition of milk in cartons %100 s r NSD007 Level control for bulk material in vessel Standards The same standards are applicable as for the inductive BEROs. Design The BEROs are available in DC or AC versions. /00 Siemens FS

201 Dielectric constants of various materials Material ε r Material ε r Alcohol 5.8 Polyethylene.3 Araldite 3.6 Polypropylene.3 Bakelite 3.6 Polystyrene 3 Glass 5 Polyvinylchloride.9 Mica 6 Porcelain 4.4 Vulcanized rubber 4 Pressboard 4 Hard paper 4.5 Quartz glass 3.7 Wood... 7 Quartz sand 4.5 Cable insulating compound.5 Silicone rubber.8 1 Teflon Air, vacuum 8 Turpentine oil. Marble 4 Transformer oil. Oiled paper.3 Vacuum. air 1 Paper. Water 80 Paraffin. Soft rubber.5 Petroleum 3. Celluloid 3 Plexiglas 5 Polyamide Built-in protection The protective circuits built into the DC versions make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage. Spurious signal suppression Short-circuit and overload protection Polarity reversal protection for connections Inductive interference protection BERO Proximity Switches Capacitive BEROs Introduction Type DC AC Operational voltage (30) V V Residual ripple Max. 10 % No-load supply current I ma Max. 1.7 ma Switching frequency f 100 Hz 0 Hz Repeat accuracy R Max. % Differential travel H to 0. s r Outputs: Rated operating current I e For DC 00 ma For 30 V AC (contactor up to size S3) - Continuous 500 ma - Up to 0 ms 5 A Smallest operating current I m Mainly inductive load 10 ma Mainly resistive load 5 ma Residual current I r ma Max. 1.7 ma Voltage drop Max. 1.8 V Max. 7 V Lead length, max. permissible 300 m Degree of protection IP67 Ambient temperature Operation C Storage C Shock resistance 30 g, 11 ms duration Resistance to vibration Hz, 1 mm amplitude Circuit diagrams DC AC Fig. 1 Fig. 3 Fig. 5 NSD0073 K BN BK BU BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves BN L K BK E1 WH E BU L BERO operated Load E1 connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves NO or NC function according to type Fig. Fig. 4 Fig. 6 NSD0077 K BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves E E L L L L NSD L 4 E1 E 3 L BERO operated Load E1 connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves NSD0074 K K 1/3 /4 NSD0075 NSD0078 K BN BU E L N GNYE PE/SL L1 E N(L) BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves NO or NC function, programmable Siemens FS /01

202 ! BERO Proximity Switches Capacitive BEROs 10 to 65 V DC No. of connecting wires Form M18 Cubic 0 mm 3 mm M30 Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1) 5 mm 5 mm 10 mm Real operating distance s r ) Adjustable Fixed comparison Adjustable Enclosure material Molded plastic Metal Metal with molded-plastic head Operational voltage (DC) V Rated operating current I e ma Displays Switching status Red LED Yellow LED Red LED Operational voltage Green LED Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG AB00 3RG16 73.AG00 3RG AC00 1) For target made of earthed metal. ) With an alignment s r > s n, the differential travel can increase significantly. Switching output Circ. Connector Order No. Order No. Order No. diag. No. type With m cable, LiYY mm mm mm NO contact, pnp 1 3RG AB00 3RG AG00 NO and NC contacts, 3 3RG AC00 pnp (compatible) With connector, Ø 8 mm NO contact, pnp A, C 3RG AG00 3RG AB00 & 3RG AG RG AC00! # LED 3 3 NSD , %! $ = # 5 9 " % $ ø3,4 13 4,3 3RG AG LED 3 3 NSD0074 5, % ' = -, 5 9! $ $ & ø3,4 13 4,3 8 Characteristics Standard target: Metal, 0 mm 0 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 0 mm 0 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground /0 Siemens FS

203 Capacitive BEROs 10 to 65 V DC No. of connecting wires Form M30 Ø 40 mm Cubic 40mm 40mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1) 10 mm 0 mm 0 mm Real operating distance s r ) Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Operational voltage (DC) V Rated operating current I e ma Displays Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Operational voltage Green LED Green LED Green LED Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG AC00 3RG AC00 3RG AC00 1) For target made of earthed metal. ) With an alignment s r > s n, the differential travel can increase significantly. Switching output Circ. Connector Order No. Order No. Order No. diag. No. type With terminal compartment Up to.5 mm Up to.5 mm Up to.5 mm NO and NC contacts, 4 3RG AC00 3RG AC00 3RG AC00 pnp (compatible) 3RG AC00 M 30x1,5 3RG AC00 ø40 3RG AC00 "! " LED Pg 9 SW NSD LED Pg 9 NSD Mounting clamp with Ø 40 mm included in scope of supply %! #! #!! -, C! # " $ $ " 5, # $ % = $ Characteristics Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Siemens FS /03

204 ! BERO Proximity Switches Capacitive BEROs 0 to 50 V AC No. of connecting wires + PE Form M30 Ø 40 mm Cubic 40mm 40mm Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Rated operating distance s n 1) 10 mm 0 mm 0 mm Real operating distance s r ) Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Enclosure material Metal with moldedplastic Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic head Operational voltage (DC) V Rated operating current I e ma Displays Switching status Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Operational voltage Green LED Green LED Green LED Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 Type 3RG LB00, 3RG LD00 3RG LD00 3RG LD00 3RG LA00 1) For target made of earthed metal. ) With an alignment s r > s n, the differential travel can increase significantly. Switching output Circ. diag. No. Connector type Order No. Order No. Order No. With m cable, LiYY mm NO contact 5 3RG LB00 NC contact 5 3RG LA00 With terminal compartment Up to.5 mm Up to.5 mm Up to.5 mm NO or NC contact programmable 6 3RG LD00 3RG LD00 3RG LD00 3RG LB00, 3RG LD00 3RG LA00 M 30x1,5! # 5, % ' = -, 5 9! $ $ & LED Pg 9 SW NSD RG LD00 ø40 LED Pg 9 NSD Mounting clamp with Ø 40 mm included in scope of supply 3RG LD00 " %! #! #!! -, C! # $ " $ " 5, # $ % = $! " Characteristics Standard target: Metal, 30 mm 30 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground Standard target: Metal, 60 mm 60 mm 1 mm, with direct connection to ground /04 Siemens FS

205 Accessories Power supply units 4FD51 83 load/system power supply Overview 4AV1 0, 4AV3 0 unstabilized DC power supplies The power supply units are suitable for connection to public and industrial supply networks in accordance with EN , The devices are suitable for installation in enclosed controls and electronics cabinets. Design: Output voltage 4 V DC according to EN for an input voltage of +6 to 10 % and a load of 0 to 100 % Safety transformer to EN 60 74, Area of application Varistor protection circuit LED status indication Emitted interference to EN Interference immunity to EN This power supply functions according to the principle of a primary switched-mode regulator and supplies a controlled DC voltage of 4 V of high stability and with low residual ripple. Design: Overload and short-circuit proof output, automatic switching off and on again Bridging of supply interruptions > 0 ms LED status indication Emitted interference to EN Interference immunity to EN The power supplies are suitable for supplying inductive and capacitive BERO proximity switches as well as the DC versions of Sonar BERO ultrasonic proximity switches and Opto BERO photoelectric proximity switches. 4AV1, 4AV3 Type 4AV1 0 4AV3 0 4FD AA00 1A Input Rated voltage (AC) V 30/115 switchable Terminals 1-4, jumper -3 V 30 Terminals 1-4, jumpers 1-3, -4 V 115 Voltage tolerance % Frequency Hz Short-circuit protection External G fuse link built in Fuse gl/gg (for 30/115 V) A 1/ /4 Circuit-breaker (for 30/115 V) A 0.4/ / Output Rated output voltage DC V 4 4 Ripple % 3 1 Control accuracy % < 1 Rated output current A Short-circuit protection Electronic, with auto. restart Electronic, with auto. restart Status indication LEDs Green LED for output voltage Conductor cross-sections Screw terminal, solid wire mm² 0, Screw terminal, stranded wire mm² 0, Flat connector (DIN 4644) mm² A Cage Clamp, solid, stranded wire mm² Securing Snap onto 35 mm mounting rail Snap onto 35 mm mounting rail Degree of protection IP00 IP0 Ambient temperature C FD51 83 Type 6EV 300 4AK00 Input Rated voltage (AC) Terminals A1 A 30 V Voltage tolerance % Power consumption 34 VA Frequency Hz Conductor cross-sections 1.5 mm² (screw terminals) Output Output voltage (DC), 4 V, stabilized connections L+ (P)/L (M) Ripple 10 % Rated output current 1000 ma Short-circuit protection Built-in Degree of protection IP0 Ambient temperature C Siemens FS /05

206 Accessories Power supply units Version Input voltage Output voltage Output current Order No. AC V DC V A SIDAC-S unstabilized DC power supply 115/ AV1 0 EB00 0A 3.5 4AV3 0 EB00 0A SIDAC-S stabilized DC 115/ FD AA00 1A power supply Power supply unit EV 300 4AK00 6EV 300 For further SIDAC-S power supplies, see Catalog LV 10, Section 13. 4AV1 0, 4AV3 0 for any arrangement, snap-mounting on DIN rail to EN FD51 83 for any arrangement, snap-mounting on DIN rail to EN AV1: dimension B = 45 4AV3: dimension B = 7 6EV 300 4AK00 Mounting dimensions Circuit diagrams 4AV1 0, 4AV3 0 4FD EV 300 4AK00 /06 Siemens FS